Home

User`s Manual

Contents

1.
2.
3. J4 Meter Mounting Connector Meter Cable Restraining Bracket Clip 6 Orient mounting bracket as noted above with meter cable still located in slot on its right hand side install mounting screws through bracket and replacement PWA and install retainers to hold screws in place Plug meter cable into connector J4 on PWA and be sure cable is still under restraining clip on front of bracket Go to Step 9 Continued on next page 176 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 9 4 Replacing PWA continued Procedure continued Table55 Replacing PWA continued Step Action 7 Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA side without cable connectors Remove screw retainers from other side of mounting screws SO you ca
4. Table 41 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close block off valve A See Figure 41 for sample piping arrangement 3 Open plug C Allow system to stabilize at head pressure 4 ae TIAS E 1 101 111111111 Be sure any switches that may trip T RI I 5 8 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NON VOL Tlale 1 T TL T T 4 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER is F c I W o RIK TIN GI and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 peje TIAIG No 21111111 Bien 6 2 LIRI 111 T T 13191111 Read present setting 0 19 00 00 Hj2 0 3 9 F 1181 RTT T PIT 13191111 Prompt asks if you want to set LRV SET IT 7 14181517111 1 applied pressure E LTR VY 11 T Pli 3 2 1 14 LRV is set to applied head pressure ES 1 0 e 2 4 1 1 210 1319 7
5. cask dd 39 1 Descrip OM emen 40 Installme Plane e Adapter IE M 41 Maring the 11311111 44 Startins Communications with Transmitter i iere pere ei Mei heer 51 Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software Versions sse 54 Chaneing Mode Of Operation sui oe s SE M NND NEM DIM MEI MSN 27 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters 63 Entering Tas NUDED M Eae E A 71 Selects Output eae ao T3 Damping A MEE ME 76 Pre Programmed Engineering Units for 78 ERV and URV Leon Eam tun dete e m deu nam tu e EN 80 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures 4 ono toe eoo Un 92 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span 84 Selecting Mode of Output Signal 91 Selecion 68548 Format 94 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an
6. 37 Figure 15 Typical Piping Arrangement for gt NPT Process 2 lt 38 Figure 16 Operating Range for ST 3000 nnne nennen 42 Figure 17 5523000 Transmitter Terminal Block nest eate o A 43 Figure 18 Ground Connection for Lightning 45 Figure 19 Typical SEC Connections SR 50 Figure 20 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections 022 00001 004000 000000000000000 0 55 Pigure 21 Display Wot 56 Figure 22 Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode of 58 Figure23 Summary or Configuration Process p duet aed ee 60 Figure 24 SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories 2 2 2 1 0000000000000000 200000 61 Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter 66 Figure 26 Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag 12 Figure 27 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity sess nnne nenne 74 Figure 28 Square Root Dropout
7. 97 Smar Meter Pushbutton Description a esee pe ERO SURE RI MINE LM 103 Smart Meter Engineering Units Codeseira R a a a a a nnns 105 Enp Ineerine 52554 Ded ero ene tendu A adu Pme 106 Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display 109 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter 2 1 422 4 02 00000000000000000000004 110 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter 1 114 Dtartup Procedure Reference pap nannte at au E Md 124 Using Transmitter in Constant Current Source 7 lt 125 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With 128 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With 131 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank 134 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank 137 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC 141 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC 145 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measureme
8. Continued on next page 98 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 NOISE E n g Calls up present meter Engineering ENTER dead ie sled Unit selection Note that unit YES 20 is shown for example MmHg 0C purposes only PSI Repeatedly press MENU ITEM key to MENU KPa step through other selections For ITEM example purposes stop when PSI MPa unit is on display mBAR BAR g cm 2 Kg cm 2 mmH20O 4C inHg 32F mH2O 4C GPM GPH Custom 6 If EU 15 Then Custom GPM go to Step 7 or GPH other than go to Step 13 Custom GPM or GPH Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 99 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 NONE Mle tle r E n g Ul n i t s Selected engineering unit is ENTER WO IRIKITINIG downloaded to transmitter and YES high low display limit setting function Seer LEE is init
9. 7 111 T velit 13191111 Call up output for display OUT Sjrjic WJOJRIK TINIG E T 13161111 Read 0 output on display for 12141910191 9 1111 corresponding input pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 0 output Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 141 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 8 If SFC and Then milliammeter readings are zero 4mA go to Step 11 are not zero go to Step 9 4mA and Tee connector is level with transmitter are not zero go to Step 10 4mA and Tee connector is above transmitter fofult P 1111 Jet 13191111 Initiate shift key selection 21111 Fite ET INPUT UUDUDUNUNZUNSCHEN Read applied input pressure Pur E AA PP pee 1 Pity 13101111 psu PE RESET TINT FT PIT Prompt asks if the applied input ZIER Ol 111 1 81112111 pressure equals zero input If it is zero input go to next keystroke If it is not press CLR key to exit function and try again COR RECT 8 NON VOL
10. 18 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 19 COMSIGCKAUOMS TOR SI 22 3 5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter 24 SEC TION 4 INSTALLATION 5 xia devicit uc SEX a Ua FI XU US EVA VU LU DU S FS C Ia MUS USE 25 41 cesso Mache ene atras esa Mo e estre M d eu EPIS PS 25 2 2 Mounting 31 3900 Transmiter tenerte c 26 7 55 cite 11 37 Aa Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter akain 42 SECTION 5 GETTING 5 2 4 2121 49 MMEFOCUCTION 49 5 2 Establishing COMMmMUNICAUOMS 50 5 07 5 54 5 4 Changing Mode Of Operation sisi Seta on e ME E RM SS of 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual V Table of Contents SECTION 6 CONFIGURA TION 59 IMU OO
11. 75 Figure 29 Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Figure 30 Keystroke Summary for Keying in LRV 51 Figure 31 Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and to Applied Pressures 83 Figure 32 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments 90 Figure 33 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication 93 Figure 34 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format 95 Figure 35 Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart 102 Figure 36 Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering 120 Figure 37 Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display 121 Figure 38 Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant Current Source Mode 127 Figure 39 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter 128 Figure 40 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter 131 Figure 41 Typical
12. Operating Liquid Seals Diaphragm Steam E Electric Heat Temperature Seals NoSeals Range Ethylene Dibutyl Valve Control stated Glycol Phthalate Note Broken lines indicate areas of caution Continued on next page 246 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Steam heating continued Figure B 8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating Steam Supply low pressure Jj fe Pipe insulated with waterproof outer cover 1 4 OD steam tracer line o valve Impulse piping with 1 4 thick insulation TE sen heat AS tracer line 2205 Pipe strap about every 15 Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping Steam trap or X 1 2 3 valve manifold condensate Jar standard type temperature l Differential pressure valvle transmitter Insulated enclosure Condensate return from steam trap All steam and condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1 per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate All condensate lines must be protected from freezing Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 247 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Steam heating continued Figure B 9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Pipin
13. 2 Figure2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation 3 Figure3 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation 4 Figure4 Typical SFC Communication Interface 8 Figure5 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components essen nnne 11 Figure 6 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter 1 1 1 1 12124004009990 nnne nnne 14 Figure 7 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation 19 Figure8 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted 5 1 1 1 2 26 Figure9 Leveling a Model STA122 or 922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter 30 Figure 10 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter 2 282 32 Figure 11 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter 33 Figure 12 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted 8 20 00 000006 000 000000000000 34 Figure 13 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation sss 36 Figure 14 Typical 3 Valve Manifold and Blow Down Piping
14. 5 ub 3114092 EY Veen P5 WNS O0O0 Va TSCOW 33L3W LAVWS 211348 4LUWSa 000 VW3 CH idlVNedl Iv 31U0N5 1N3WdIQ03 G v SILON 34313 3ANUJ 33I33V85 Ue ENDO Sn1vavddv 31919055 131311332 2313 32 3LUN 5 2114 WS OOEVWS 006 001 531435 000515 T 41 41 1 9 5 e y amp o 58 MENSES SISSE 22228 I 310N Doa 1N3WdIn83 xv 2 1081309 S1 valvddv 319190559 2121 411532 33 I3N35 I 310N ee 4 5 006 ____ 006 001 53183506 Ex Sapo E e3LINSNVHL 00015 0 1 SNUCAVZVH NUILVOUlI SNOUCAVZVH NON ET eT TT OT 6 8 N 2 9 S v E L 31935 LON UG 30 LHS 00 90 01319 2 Aza 41925 m pu Tovon DATE EvevdelS H 3114093 jN O00 VMWel ISCUW DO IVNV NOILdO 41144 41 28 000 VNWel Ev2v0els 1 1924 O34 LA jA 00 Ve eb 29 XS 006 001 531435 d3LLINSNVeSHI 000515 ET eT TT OT IV 006 001 S3IN3S e 311 y NSINVel UOS LS djlIVvNadl Iv JIW OQOEVWS SL 9I 552 2 8 2 9 3100 IN3WdIRQO3
15. Maintenance arto bateau eaten ed oatmeal 170 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier 171 94 Replacing TETUER 175 9 5 Replacing Meter BOOY epos it edis tu 178 vi ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Table of Contents SEC TION 10 CALIBRATION riiin 183 118 98 1 6 4 mM NEL 183 pM 184 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output HE 185 10 4 Calibrating Range with fon 189 10 5 192 SECTION 11 TROUBLESHOO TNG 195 i ig e MN o e rc TE 195 DIEGO VUE sane 196 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC 197 TA MESSAGES 199 tS SAUS eee at 202 14 6 1 Messages 2 51
16. Printed Circuit Board 1 E uL II UM DE Process Manger PROM otiosa ien Programmable Read Only Memory H M Ma Pounds per Square Inch Pounds per Square Inch Absolute 42 ee IM Ed Radio Frequency Interference viget Smart Field Communicator TotalPlant Solution il M tite Upper Range Limit URV uc M UP LU UE Upper Range Value E Volts Direct Current DN Transmitter Xil ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Technical Assistance If you encounter a problem with your ST 3000 Smart Transmitter check to see how your transmitter 1s currently configured to verify that all selections are consistent with your application If the problem persists you can reach Honeywell s Solution Support Center for technical support by telephone during normal business hours An engineer will discuss your problem with you Please have your complete model number serial number and software revision number on hand for reference You can find the model and serial numbers on the transmitter nameplates You can also view the software version n
17. 1 13161111 Call up output for display OUT SIF IC 13191114 Read 0 output on display for 11 Tef Jelele 4 TT T T corresponding empty tank pressure plus head pressure H For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 0 output 8 Close plug C Continued on next page 134 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank continued Procedure continued Table 38 starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank Continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 Open valve A to begin measuring tank pressure Leave LP side vented to SITES Iff tle URV Nom atmosphere calculated on the approximate density of the liquid and or tank height the exact URV can be set by filling the tank to the desired full scale level and then setting the URV through the SFC See section 6 7 in this manual for details 10 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to applied tank level pressure If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting
18. e EI ONU ae DUM MEM 226 Figure 65 SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories ccccceeeseseeeessteeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeessnnaeaeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeas 228 Figure B 1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid 238 Figure B 2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid 239 I3sure B 5 Piping Installation tor Gas FIOW 240 Figure B 4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals 24 Figure B 5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm 5 242 Figure B 6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and 243 Figure B 7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control 244 Figure B 8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating 247 Figure B 9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating 248 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7
19. 31 41 IV 1 4 03 9 9 SJLUND QI3L83ANI2 U3IMNVID 8 LNUO 4 14 ALILINS 4 4 E AlddfS IW O0EVWS 3 4770249 9 006 001 31 35 T NOISIAIG IIL I 559712 OOOSLS NUILVOL C I3IJdISSV 19 Sfi el v Z vH NLIILLVOL 1 SNUCAVZVH NUON ET TT OT 6 8 21 4 9 gt dh 640 LHS 00 90 01319C I 31 28 vl ET ONIMVAC 37995 LON EL erst alah ders LN s 006 001 53135 AALLNSNVal 000515 JLUN 9 440249 NUISIAIG II I 55912 NELLY SEIL SUE 411 TT OT N Z LZ 3 9 SALON 83183ANDO 83I88lv8 SNLVAVddv 31VIJUSSV I3AUalddV ALLLIN d JJW DAGCv IvdvO2d 3114092 1 3lUN LNAWdIf8 4 JUS ENDO 310 Addins NOILYOU SNUANYZVH NUN ONIAVAT 31995 LON DATS Irdr d 3TILXIV 90 ANON 3795 WI O00 ViWel T3ILIW 44144 1 11910 NOILdO 3134 3138 000 VMWel 31 1 IV I J Tyev0eTS 2 2 ZI ON T 3 9 SALON QI313AND3 H3BRIVID SNLVAVdd ALON IN3WdINOS 091 092 S Eun Y 1 ALLLIN3 2943 21010 WI 00EVWH 59 NIA 006 001 53143
20. 4 INPUT 1111 T Plt T3Te HT Display shows current transmitter Sum 1 56 1111 output level and it will update every PUT six seconds Be sure to time your oju T P 1 JP T 30111 next key press with an updated 13 2 141 display 5 111 T felt 13101111 Key in 3096 for desired output signal 111131 1111151111 level of 8 8 mA 2 2V 1 PIT 13101111 LE gp 13121111 15 11111 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 125 7 3 Running Analog Output Check continued Procedure continued Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant Current Source Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 6 NON VOL 111 T 3 1 Output signal is set at 3096 8 8 ENTER 5 1 61 1 1 11 2 2 V A fF character appears Yes on right side of display to remind you jojU T P 1 3 0 1 1 that transmitter is in its output mode _ 13121 1919 15111111 7 Check that receiving device indication is If indication is inaccurate check at its 3096 point If applicable check that calibration of receiving device milliammeter reading is 8 8 mA or voltmeter reading is 2 2 V across 250 ohm resistor 8 Steps 5 and 6 to check Use transmitter output as a
21. 1 5 31V33N39 AO 350 LUN LSAW 5 314498 OL C3193NNU2 LNAWdINOS TOALNOD w 0006 9 532945 sieeus 201121 Oot H 44 8uiu4u8r1 uoN Yolzdq 44 6 H Dajauag ajos 4 4841 006 001 591 95 000615 JI ry cJ 69 N 2049 44 81 10 WS OOEVWS 0 Fl WS ASLSW 14945 179907 id 3 144 5 JISNIALNI HhOSTI 11 JMe 9 N C 0 12 34 00 Val d D 95001 001 AOE N E afl ALILN3 CT JLUND SaASLAWVaAVd ALILNG LN3WdIRQn93 CG 9 SSLON Del ENDO CAS LASANOD aS Aaa N31 LIWSNYSL Sh LVelVddaVv I31VIQUSSV 0015 0065 31411433 000615 C ALON 2313 32 ie US 2 68660616 S313 E 9 1 5 19901 di 20d 113155 8128 06 SJJIAAU BIET 11v 3B TFT 21902 197 DOWNY 543130 119 40 12 91809223402 WS O0EVWa AW 00EVWa I 9900 gt O SE A0E gt on SNUILdU 434134 JLUWJ OOOEVWS gt wA SedLdAVeVd 111 4 G1 9 10221115 16 NDILVOJU SNUCAVZVH NUN ADA 912024 Md e 2 ADA 061202 LA dS vEec664 664 240 7 3190 551 Bec EAMUS el TT OT 5 8 N 2 9 E T 98 0 31130V2 MING cadisava 5 LV G3CINAIDSO 0141 5 SNUILVOIlddV JAAA T 1924 419025 LON OC WV
22. 1 11111 sit 2 _ sit jejeiNjF je m SjE N SJO RJ JTJEJMIPI H A _ sit 2 m 1 0 7 7 5 1 2 0 0 154 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction Background Analog and DE mode differences ATTENTION Procedure Transmitters are shipped with default failsafe direction of upscale This means that the transmitter s output will be driven upscale maximum output when the transmitter detects a critical status You can change the direction from upscale to downscale minimum output by cutting jumper W1 on the Printed Wiring Assembly PWA If your transmitter is operating the analog mode an upscale failsafe action will drive the transmitter s output to greater than 21 mA ora downscale action will drive its output to less than 3 8 mA If your transmitter is operating the DE mode an upscale failsafe action will cause the transmitter to generate a infinity digital signal or a downscale failsafe action will cause it to generate a infinity digital signal The STIMV IOP module interprets either signal as not a number and initiates its own configured failsafe action for the control system The STDC card initiates the failsafe mode configured through the trans
23. Tiv 00 90 0T 912044 LAJ3 00 20 20 0618034 0 34 46 62 6 3593734 NUILVOD I 5 VvZvH NLUN 0 v2 64 E ddd 3190 3 NUISIA3S EIBEIEEEEBEBEEXI 11111111 vi OL 5 29 1 0 21140993 T3I 1ddns SI LI HOIHA 304 19 160860 IVv2V s3HIDU 35014404 ANY 3D 0350 LON LSAW 329N3GILJNDO NI QG3Ildd ls SI ONIAVAT UFIJAA3NUH JO ALYAdDad JHL SI SNIAV3UI JO lIHOISAdUOS JHL CNIWDSWHO 081 CNIWDSWHO 008 lt 82 CNIWDSWHO 008 CXVWIADE TIVHS Se31JAVavd 103 JHL CASN 349 SadlidAVevd WHO LIOA HLIM 54318898 el XNASONVG NON 4 915430 153 INdW3OV IdW3 AND 44408559 5 LNVaOQDO 31 LN3AdIDO3 1 ASLLOANNODAC 30 INVAV NOISO 319518 LNGA3SSILSGAV ISIIVIOddS 519 48 LSAW 0334 SjONVHO 0 14 4 INSWNOOd NDIILVOId3ILS2O SNOCAVZVH NON 38 OL NAONA SI Vad SHL 440 G3HOLIAS N338 SVH 5531 0 LNAWdINODA LOANNOOSIC LON DG GaVvZVH NUISU IdX3 SNINSVA SONINAVM JHL 3ASSS8U CSalseva In Hll SNDILVTIVISNI NI II NOILSIGSISNF ONIAVH ALIYOHLAY 12345 1V907 OL 34189143229 SV 30 WoOldlIsals NVIGVNVD LINGNOO 1914 NOILOSNNOO 404 N UISIAUSd HLIIA Janspm19N3 31891105 9 TIVA JHL 1 AD gt NI GATIW
24. 14945 199071 0 12 442 19 xou xou XONA SAALAWVAVd ALILN SAALAWVaVd ALILN3 2141 11 5 0015 0065 000615 58660614 JILIN 14945 19211 MO 81126 06 313 eN 2 310ND III 55 72 5 4 3 II 55912 12449 dnU3D I 55 13 ANOASNIALNE 411840245 4495 ATIVOISNISLNI 01 39 02 I 13IHS 5 006 NI 00EVIal 3A 00 VW SNOILdO 44144 4 OOOEWS NDUILVOL I 0 16 924 640 LHS 00 90 013190 2 371995 341935 LON 5 006 O G 2 zl Xe ua WV WS O0EVWS ISCUW 421408 LAVWS NOILdO 42140 3LlDWde 000 WS 419 41 IV YALLINSNVYl 000515 IH IV WS OOEVWS ALON III 55913 4913 dn a5 II SSV19 dnoad I 55919 ANOASNIALNI 3lIS 038S 34VS ATIVOISNIALNI 91x3 5 000515 1920 1 111 11559123 50121 279 6 8 2 I TT OT DAG e evev0e 41114093 160860 IV2V ALON LNAWdINOS 0909 23951106 SNLVAVddV 31VIOUSSV 31311339 952 ALON ALON
25. 0 000000 00 0 215 Parts Identification for Callouts Figure 218 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59 22 0000000000000000 2 219 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body 220 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60 0202220002 010000000000 5 28 02 3 221 Parts Identification tor Callouts Fiure 222 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 62 002200000 011 555502222 223 Parts Identification tor Callouts in Figure 03 oi e ree a a i e 225 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64 000222200 0000 0010000000000005000500 4 226 Parts Identification for Callouts Figure ea 229 summary of Recommended Spare 230 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection ERR RR EXER 246 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature 250 Factory Mutual Parameters opo eire e t Ap 25 CSA PF EN EPI Mines 258 CENELEC LCIBCetitBicallofiaa oen e an Rue 261 Standards Australia Ci OSC Cert Catton si 262 Zon
26. 300312313 GNNOND 31491105 V OL Q3103NNU2 38 0015 0065 0006 15 46 0 06 Ns HONI 3405938 AYINIT 54314494 AINIZ 5019 44 03191255 03191151 ATTIVOINVA 1V9 NUN 8 e e o IN3WdIn83 SIHL ONITIWLSNI LR C3A07704 38 LSAW ONIAVAC 1 11915 S 338 12VJ0NVW Snlvavddv 03191201559 1 WewKeuoH zs E Quom C3AUNddV OS 41 NOLLVOUT C3LJISSV 12 SNOCAYZYH NOISIAIG I 55 12 NI 311v 1SNI SNLVAVdd C31VIOUSSV T3AUSddV 2343 38 15 501 44 C31VIOUSSV 9 WA Bddv JAWA LNOLIM G3llIWaN3d SI ONIMVAC SIHL OL ON S o owe 92144 VSI ISNV CNV 5 one 6 ssaeus 254255 outs al ce sous 04 4 15 OIN IHL 40 05 3121189 HLIA 029 NI 38 IST NUILV 119154 Goyouy JW 8 5 5 IN 000 552995 350 LON LSAW Snivavddv 131190559 OL 03123 2 LNAWdINOA TOALNOD 76 11114 31492 031517 ILAN V ONISN 533814 ANY 1500 LSNIVOV S3IMIN3 378V2 34 006 saeaus WS 0006 2 staeus 735 135 LON SI LINGNOD WLIW 01014 SNDILVTIVISNI 55912 8 55910 304 2 WS 00 9 s 2aus Wd ejes AwooisulaiuI 1 S aaus 11 199 gt 814023 03 FI AO PSI lt FA AD DOAK sessmes corsas 0000 H 3 1517919345 STWADAdd voi dg 4004da 6uju4u6r31 uo0N 30044 CAZINOHLNY
27. LP Blockoff Plug G Plug F Valve B Differential Pressure Transmitter For the procedure in Table 39 we are assuming that all the valves on the three valve manifold and the block off valves were closed at installation Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Open equalizer valve C See Figure 39 for sample piping arrangement Continued on next page 128 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 39 starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 3 Open valves A and HP block off to make Allow system to stabilize at full static differential pressure zero 0 by applying pressure zero differential same pressure to both sides of meter body 4 DE READ Tlale 1 101 1111111
28. SFC failed a communications diagnostic check Could be an SFC electronic problem or a faulty or dead communication loop Check polarity and try again Press STAT and do any corrective action required and try again Check communication loop Replace SFC THATS RJEJS LJOJ Either there is too much resistance in loop open circuit voltage is too low or both Check polarity wiring and power supply There must be 11 volts minimum at transmitter to permit operation Check for defective or misapplied capacitive or inductive devices I Ps on the loop wiring Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 203 11 6 Interpreting Messages continued Interpretation table continued Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table continued Message Possible Cause What to Do R E S T O R E IW 1 8 Hardware mismatch Part of Save Restore function Nothing SFC tried to restore as much of database as possible 5 015 31011118 I AN Transmitter is operating as a current source Press OUTPUT and CLR keys to tell transmitter to exit output mode Tjj JRJEJSJPJOINISIE Transmitter sent illegal response to SFC Try communicating again mj
29. EUD GPM EU6 mbar EU7 bar 222 EUF Custom Continued on next page 120 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Button Pushing Figure 37 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to Summary set the lower and upper display limits Figure 37 Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display Limits SQUARE ROOT Mode LINEAR Mode Set Lower Set Upper Yes Range Value Range Value Vic digit to BLANK A Set 1 digit to 1 Lower Upper Value Value If display limit was previously set KNOWN VALUE indicator lights Value Value and set value flashes in display Note that lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 00 for units in SQUARE ROOT mode Set sign segment A Set sign segment BLANK for positive to minus sign for values negative values Set magnitude range 19 99 199 9 1999 oe 19 99K 199 9K 1999K 19990K 2 A Vv Set active digit value 0 to 9 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 121 6 13 Disconnecting SFC Considerations Be sure a character does not appear on the right side of the SFC display indicating that the transmitter may be in its current output mode or the SFC has detected a non critical status condition jp 31011139 Example LSE If the character is o
30. 111 13191111 Zero input is set equal to applied ERES 51 61 9 0 8 1115161 1 11 1 input pressure Go to Step 11 Yes 1 13191111 E YN PT 1 13101111 es Continued on next page 142 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 43 starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 10 E LRV 096 G SET NON VOL ENTER Yes EERE VL 11 ejr 19 jejejeje 811111 ERI VL Hp ejr 211 1 81 EERE VEL Hp ejr 316111 219 210 5 811111 Read present setting Prompt asks if you want to set LRV to applied pressure LRV is set to applied pressure 11 Close Tee connector and slowly open block off valve to apply process pressure to transmitter 12 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to zero and full scale pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readi
31. 4001 jos z 348 ees Aieersumu uew 1 JHL NI LNIOd ANY LV Q3103NNOO 38 AVW MOIVOINDWAOO 01314 LYVWS V uondo jooug buiujubri uoN uondo LYOddNS OL ASVSS3O3N SI gt lt 9105 KA ooisuuju l uoN 006 001 Seues 000615 3ONVISISdH 4001 JO SWHO OSE 40 WNWINIA Y JIESVSN SI GSHOLVH 55042 W gt 39VL1OA 9SNIIVS3idO 72 GZ 0 N NN MOLIVOINRnINIWOO SSS osz LYVWS 3ONVISIS34 4001 099 V delV SNOGHYVZVH NON gt a Qq31Vv9O1 s83AIl3934 d e3LLIASNVeI 000615 Adddns ASLIW T X 2v18 Tay Nw y ONIMIM 2 0 LZOZ J 1531 y 00 40 40 v UJ OL 27125600 see y UAI 15 006 9001 5351435 6 01 6 Gaga c LE 8 290 13593734 m WNSIS daly 3190 3 NIISIA3N 551 9 az 11111111 s v e 2 r Hs OT 6 8 2 9 ANI v T 09 0 pe ONIMVAT 37995 LON 8 00 10 03150 ABS SNUN 37955 m 4 39VLIOA SNILVH3dO Gov S6 55222 9 0 082 151544 4001 99 Q V DAC Z09 GZ7 31140 9 SALON AONVISISSY 83AI3038 1 51549 J4IM 51 03 AONVLISISSY 001 WANVW NOILONYLSNI 335
32. Procedure continued Table 47 Cutting Failsafe Direction Jumper Step Action 1 Turn OFF transmitter power Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of transmitter housing If applicable carefully turn Local Smart Meter counterclockwise to remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from housing Unplug flex tape and power connectors from component side of PWA and remove PWA With component side of PWA facing you locate failsafe direction jumper W 1 and cut it in half with small wire cutter such as dykes See Figure 48 This changes failsafe action from upscale to downscale Reverse applicable previous steps to replace PWA Turn ON transmitter power Figure 49 Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper on PWA Failsafe Direction Jumper Power Connector Meter Connector 156 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area Background You can enter or edit a message in the scratch pad area of memory consisting of two groups of 16 characters each through the SFC Procedure The procedure in Table 48 outlines the steps for editing a sample message in the scratch pad area This procedure assumes that SFC communications have been established wi
33. Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 RESET 111 T felt 13101113 Calibrate output signal to 0 ELI 1 Pity j3jort 1s C OJRJRIEJC T iZ EIRIO 8 Check that milliammeter or voltmeter IS VOL bue If reading is Then correct go to Step 11 lower than 4mA go to Step 9 or 1V higher than go to Step 10 4mA or 1V 9 A 111 T felt 1310111118 Gradually raise output to 4mA or 1V NEXT 1 111 Fe lolulN TIs reading Repeat this Step as required joju T P 1 jPjT 131011 ts WOIRIKITINIG 1 131011 ts JNICJRIEJAJISJEJD 4 1 131011 ts C O R RJEJ C T JDJAJC Z EIRIO 10 ojule FAT 1 felt 1310111118 Gradually decrease output to 4mA or PREV 11 e o u N T s 1V reading Repeat this Step as required 1 Pit j3jort 15 5 jwjojR KI INIGI 1 PIT 83101118 4 1 PIT 31011118 C OJRJRIEJC T 2 11 111 T felt 3 1 Call up output for display OUT SIF iC Continued on next page 186 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 10 3 Calibrati
34. 810118 MJE T EJRJBJOJD Y Pressure input is two times greater than URL of transmitter e Check range and if required replace transmitter with one that has a wider range Meter body may have been damaged Check the transmitter for accuracy and linearity Replace meter body and recalibrate if needed s T A T U S jP T 31011118 DjA C CJO MIP No temperature compensation data exists for D A converter Effect will be minor degradation of ambient temperature influence specifications Replace electronics module solna A jSj EjNJSJOJR JOJV EJRITJE MP Meter body temperature is too high Accuracy and life span may decrease if it remains high Take steps to insulate meter body from temperature source 5 015 PjT 310118 11111111 Selection is unknown Be sure SFC software is latest version Press SHIFT and 3 to view SFC software version 198 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 11 4 Diagnostic Messages Summary The diagnostic messages can be grouped into one of these five categories e Non Critical Failures Transmitter continues to calculate PV output Critical Failures Transmitter drives PV output to failsafe state e Communications Errors Invalid Key Entry Errors Interrupt Messages A description of the messages in each category 18 given in t
35. a405 no2isulA4ur 006 001 591495 000615 isnw 5 129 ONIASANIDNG LNA3WAOOUG NUILVOIdILeS 2 2 Ce 4 um 6 88 ALON 0 2 17 WS OOEVWA HNOST 17 AW N3L3WN QNNOdSD ISIHS 0 11 WNI 00EVIWS3 0 1 WS N3L3A LAYWS 19907 ALAAVS JISNIALNI HNOST 11 AW OOEVWA 2010 0 12 z VWGed oO VWGed Avidy XWA Aver SAFLAWVAVd JALON 5441 4 ALILNG IN4AWdINOS 4 3 9 SALON 10811413 QI3183AND2 83INNVE Sn yv day 331 LINSNVAL 319120559 0015 0065 3AU2ddV 000815 ALON ALLLIN3 Oa Ass 58660616 JILIN 021 LYVWS 1 1 ul 6 31D V am 7 13IHS S3JOIA3Q 001 119 1 941040951591 211134 OO IVNV 433134 dUD1 119 40 12 310922492 WS 00EVWal WT 00EVWal AW O0E VW SI MD 31 MET Avi2y gt XO A SNUILIJU 3313W 31UW38 000EVW3 2 31DND 54 1 ALILNJ 9 3 Ssdnuao9 NHISIAIG III 3 II I 55919 NIILVOL SOUGSVZVH NLIN 1o SOHO vr 812 0 6 2264 00 90 01 912024 AAS 00 40 20 0612021 AJY 66 ET 0T S 22664 0 34 6 62 6 3SV3 133 V 3190 NOISIAZa 551 2 2 2 2 2 gg I T 43 PPPE 2 0216 T q
36. o JDJAJTJAJBJAISIE Transmitter database was incorrect at powerup Try communicating again Verify database configuration Manually update non volatile memory with each parameter jf 31901111 INIVJAJEJE e Requesting transmitter to correct or set its URV to a value which results in too small a span or correct its LRV or URV while in output mode e Keystroke is not valid for given transmitter e Check that correct URV calibration pressure is being applied to transmitter or that transmitter is not in output mode Check that keystroke is applicable for given transmitter THATS jt oJojP Not enough resistance in series with communication loop Check sensing resistor and increase resistance to at least 2500 81011118 1 Joj VIEJRJEJOJAJD 5 81011118 MjE TJEJRJBJOJD Y Pressure input is two times greater than URL of transmitter e Check range and if required replace transmitter with one that has a wider range Meter body may have been damaged Check the transmitter for accuracy and linearity Replace meter body and recalibrate if needed s T A T U S jP T 30111 MjE T E R BjO D Y FJA U L Electronics PWA and meter body are incompatible Obtain matching meter body for given transmitter model and series
37. 3 1 P RECT NON VOL ENTER Yes popu TP 1 PIT 316111 Fite PUN 13 316111 EESTI rm 1 13101111 LT 999 59 np pg np PUN P ujT 13 13160111 13 31691111 NJ 13101111 PUN 1 13101111 Initiate shift key selection Read applied input pressure Prompt asks if the applied input pressure equals zero input If it is zero input go to next keystroke If it is not press CLR key to exit function and try again Zero input is set equal to applied input pressure 10 Repeat Steps 6 to 8 11 Close equalizer valve C 12 Open valve B and LP block off valve to begin measuring process differential pressure 13 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to applied input pressure If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 14 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 130 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS
38. 5 F S JOUR PjT 310111 715 JUJPIS CJAJL E F S JOUR PjT 810111 JS 8 Continued next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 153 8 2 Accessing Operation Data continued Procedure continued Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access continued IF you want to view THEN use these keystrokes the present temperature 5 C measured by CONF circuitry in the transmitter s sensor ATTENTION vou can change the temperature engineering units to F R or K by pressing the UNITS key to select and then the CONF key to return to the temperature display Yes _ sit 1 1111 sit iMjeitje r jCloinif ijg 2 Ul _ sit SjE N SJO RJ JTJEJMIPI 2 m 5 12 m 2 2 _ sit 1 ere 5 the present message in the t T spo HT scratch pad area of memory 11111 TIsInIfiEITI E TEL T Pjajo EEEL EET 5 1 2 22 50 25 S TIC HL 2 the PROM serial number 111 ISP
39. G 3 SALON I3183ANDU2 33I38NV8 SNLVAVddY I31VIOISSV 31411449 2313 32 CE ALON 14 5 31UN LNAWdINOS CS 3 SALON 0 IND 43183ANU2 33I38V85 SNLVAVddV 14119120559 L3T3I Eel 2 9313339 31UN 5 NOILVOU SNUGaVZVH NUN v c 43 Ev2v0els I 1924 240 1HS 00 90 013194 2 31 25 0 16 E vt ET 1 Ee 37995 LON IS OT C3N 42414 DAGCTvTOEVZVOSTIS ut 31134093 IWADALNI 310 1N3AdIQnO3 G SILON 3 3 133AND 27 8E 3Iel9IV 8 AUS ENDS snlvavddy I31VI9DSSV 131411 3433 2313 32 3100 5 006 001 S3IN3S YALUANSNVal 000515 GL T NIILVOU 1 SfLGeVZVH NLN 43 4926 230 1 00 90 olaL a 5 Aza 31925 2 0216 EX 006 001 Salads ONIA VeG 3795 LON d3lll ASNVHLI 000515 ZI OL 6 V T IV G 3 SALON I3183AND2 33IS8I V8 SNLVAVddV C3LVIOUSS 131411442 3J 1HN32 WS 00 Vel OII 9 X33 NOILVOU 1 SNUCAVZVA NOILVOU DAG S Ev2v0gTS 8 31134493 JLON LNaWdINOSA ALS LNLI 31UN5 SNOUTAVZVA NON 43 v2v02
40. T NOISIAIG III II I 55912 555 19 SIC Z vr DAGZ TIvevOg ut 31144 3 ALON LNAWdINGA 23 953100 GIL 3L833AND2 313Ialf9 V8 JUS ENDS Snlvavddv 13191215594 I3AUSddV ALLLIN3 3LLN 5 011920 I dz I Tvev0elS vt 37925 LUN DATS Irdr0 d 31134973 00 80 0 319 0 34 31935 TI DRETIS ey CJW NOILdO 33134 1 4931 1 310ND 7 9 SILON INAWdINOS QI3L43ANO2 S3THSVED A8 LNDD 51949449 131919058579 q3A0ddd ALILIN3 JJW E 3100 e 3AUd 006 001 531035 YILUWSNVAL 000515 2 310 9 T NOISIAIG 9 I 55 13 NLIILVOL 031351559 19 2 920 2 TT OT 6 9 S v 2 I 0 1 995 640 6 LHS 00 90 013194 I ANON 31 25 Ivevoelg 5 WU 00 viNel ONIAVaGO 31935 LUN DG Wd WV 0Q0 VWe 12008 44144 IVLIDIC 14 SLUW4a 000 VhWel IV 006 001 S3I83S e3LHIIASNVeSHIL 000515 006 001 S3IN3S YALLINSNVal 000515 el OI 6 Ht ONIAIM djlIVvNedl IV WO 00 Vel ALON D 3 j4 3 12 8Vv 9 T NDISIAIG IL I 55913 NOILVOO I3I3ISSV 152 SNUCAVZVA
41. FM Range Mode of Operation Analog DE Tag Number Output Conformity Square Root Damping Time Seconds _ 0 00 lo 10 3 105 11 0 120 140 8 0 16 0 32 0 Engineering Units 20 LU bar 2 mmH2O 4C mmHg OC mbar G cm 2 1 2 4c eer L 20 cor Lower Range Value 4 mAdc Upper Range Value 20 mAdc Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only Single Range Dual Range STDC single Range W SV Message Format DE Mode Only W O DB 4 Byte W DB 6 Byte Failsafe Mode STDC Card DE Mode Only F S B O Lo F S FSO B O Lo 5 Eis Fso 5 50 Failsafe Direction Analog Mode Upscale Downscale Write Protect Option Read and Write Read Only Configured By Date 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 251 252 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Appendix D Hazardous Locations Reference Reference Information nformation is provided to clarify the hazardous location installation requirements in North America and internationally An explanation of the applicable enclosure classification systems 1s also provided D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Electrical Codes Installation of elec
42. Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Replacing PWA Replacing Meter Body About this section This section provides information about preventive maintenance routines cleaning barrier diaphragms and replacing damaged parts 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 169 9 2 Preventive Maintenance Maintenance routines ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance and schedules routine at regularly scheduled intervals However you should consider carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines on a schedule that 1s dictated by the characteristics of the process medium being measured and whether blow down facilities or purge systems are being used e Check piping for leaks e Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter e Clean the transmitter s pressure chambers including the barrier diaphragms 170 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Background Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being measured sediment or other foreign particles may collect in the process head cavity chamber and cause faulty measurement In addition the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms the transmitter s meter body may become coated with a residue from the process medium The latter 1s also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type transmitters I
43. button to select the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired value is on display use 9 for example purposes Continued on next page 116 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in second digit and activate next active digit Honeywell Readout now displays next active digit which will be zero unless upper value was set before 0 990 00 ANALOG Press Increase A button to select the next available digit value or Decrease button to select the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired value is on display use 9 for example purposes 0 1 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in third 0 digit and activate next active digit ANALOG Readout now displays next active digit which will be BLANK unless upper value was set to 1 before Press and hold to scroll backward through values Press and hold to scroll forward through values Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 117 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display cont
44. its SQUARE ROOT Flow mode 1 191115131811 1 the prompts INVALID REQUEST ilglulrlel and Download Error are sequentially displayed after the SFC WORKING prompt and the EU Hi prompt is called up for display At this point you can change the upper display limit as shown in Step 8 or press the A NEXT key to call up the EU Lo prompt See Step 10 to change the lower display limit or press the A NEXT key and then the CLR key to exit the function 14 If you selected one of these engineering If selected engineering unit does not units match one of six unit indicators on inH2O meter you can use a stick on label mmHg from Honeywell drawing 30756918 PSI 001 Just peel off matching engineering unit label from drawing GPM or and carefully paste it in lower right GPH hand corner of display verify that corresponding unit indicator is lit on Local Smart Meter display Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 101 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Keystroke summary Figure 35 shows the keystroke summary for configuring the Local Smart Meter using the SFC for quick reference Figure 35 Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart Meter NON VOL ENTER YES Custom GPM or GPH unit only Number Hi Limit NON VOL ENTER YES Meter Not Supported 102 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Mode
45. 13191111 Call up output for display OUT 5 WJORIKITINIG L T8HT 13161111 Read 0 output on display for dJel Jelele 19411 11 corresponding empty tank pressure plus reference pressure H2 For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output 8 If you Then can not fill tank go to Step 9 can fill tank go to Step 10 9 Key in URV that is equal to full tank You can use these formulas to pressure See section 6 7 in this manual calculate URV in inH2O for details on keying in a range value Span H1 x S Go to Step 12 H1 Height of variable head in inches 5 Specific gravity of measured liquid URV Span LRV Example If H1 equaled 10 feet the measured liquid was water and the equaled 135 36 20 substituting into the formulas yields Span 10 ft x 12 in x 1 00 Span 120 inH2O URV 120 inH2O 135 36 inH2O URV 15 36 inH2O ATTENTION The specific gravity of water at 60 F 15 6 C is 1 00 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 149 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals continued Procedure continued Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 10 F 91 RT T 1 13191111 R
46. 15 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 139 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge pressure GP type transmitter in a pressure or liquid level measurement application Refer to Figures 43 and 44 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 43 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter Block off Pipe Union ZA oo valve no 1 Plug n Y Gauge Pressure Transmitter j M ee Process Block off valve no 2 Tee connector Figure 44 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type Transmitter To Process Head connection on meter body Block off valve Gauge Pressure Transmitter Y Tap location at the minimum level to be measured Continued on next page 140 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter Continued Procedure continued ATTENTION For the procedure Table 43 we are assuming that piping arrangement includes a block off valve and a Tee connector If your piping does not include a Tee connector you can only verify that the input and output r
47. 163 Fiere 327 191 Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference secscsccccceesesssssseeecceessscccceesssessssssseseees 210 Figure 54 ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference 292 211 Figure 55 Series 100 900 Electronics Housing Electronics Meter End eese 212 Figure 56 Series 100 900 Electronics Housing Terminal Block 212 Figure 57 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp STD930 C D G HI asd ando DD T ne 214 Figure 58 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 4 STD930 A B E F and J 217 Figure 59 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter 219 Figure 0 Series 900 Dual Head GP Meter Bodiess RE 221 Figure 61 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter 222 Figure62 Serres 900 Plush Mount Meter Body i tg rin eet eee be ena canneries 223 Figure 63 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter eese 224 64
48. 18 1517 1 61 Callup next configuration NEXT SjEJR 1110171715111219019 parameter Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 161 8 5 Procedure continued Saving and Restoring a Database continued Table 49 saving and Restoring a Database continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 19 AP sit 0 11 61 Call up save restore function NEXT 5 5 11018 1 21 20 iS A v E R E s T O R E Prompt asks if you want to save ENTER D A T A database from this transmitter Yes 21 slA viE R E s T o R E Call up prompt for restore function It NEXT FRIE S TJO RIE JDJAJ T A asks if you want to restore saved database in this transmitter 22 IRIEISTTIOIRIET T Prompt asks for confirmation of ENTER Y OJU SJUIRIEI database restore function Yes 23 5 Answer yes to prompt and initiate ENTER Sj F C database restore function Yes Ei d d Md dB La PETE HH Saved database has been restored JRIEJSITISIREEIDU 1 written to transmitter s memory jR E S TjOJR E JDJAjTJA CLR 1517 c oiN F G Return
49. 371995 0 ONIMVAC 371995 LON UQ o 2D 006 001 531035 ej3LIIANSNVeSHL 000515 OI WV HE ALVNaal IV WS OQOEVWS 11106 Ssy13 9 43 dNDAD II q 2 8 V dNDAD I 55919 SANOASNIALNI 114 245 4495 ATIVOISNIALNI 1 9 3 55 125 SfIDOSIVZVH 7 D Aq9 ezvevOc 111403 00 40 40 4 3 ALON INaWdINO4 7 3 9 SALON TN NU 3183ANU2 33I33V8 SNLVAVddV 31 VIJUSSV Catal Der 952 5 NOTLVOU SHDOSVZVH NLN 43 5 1 1954 vt 5 3035 ET 006 001 531835 000615 TT 37 25 LUN 00 LL OT JALVYNASL Iv JW 00 YWA 31UND III 85919 197173 dnUs 55919 q 29 8 V 49 I 55 13 JnO3SNIMINI 31130335 34 5 NLILLVOLI 1 01 3 EL 3IJ3ISSV 19 SNUGQAY ZYH J 9 SALON QI3143ANCJ 8 3ISRIVED Shi Velvddv Q31VIOUSSV 031311313 955 DAC 00 18 31140929 00 20 20 9 3LUN 1 3 1051 09 5 e 3AUd SNOTAV ZVH NLIN dJ RE 2 0 15 qvod ONIMVaC 37995 LON DG DAC 8 11140973 640 8 LHS 00 90 01 31
50. AlddNS 4 ANY 1 04 NOILOANNOO 1 01414 LYVWS 3HL N33M138 SWHO 062 40 3ONVISIS3M 531435 38 ISAW 318I S329V SNOILO3NNOO LV MALLINSNVYL 000615 JHL S SNlMNVE JHL N33MI38 4001 JHL NI LNIOd IV Q3lO3NNOO 38 AVW YOLVOINNWWOO 01414 LYVWS NOILVOINNWWOO 14044005 OL ASVSS3O3N SI JONVLISISSY dOO 40 SWHO OSZ 40 V SNIIVH3dO 318 5 SI Q3HOIVH 55080 p lt 43 0924 EDS YOLVOINNWNWOOD 91313 LYVWS i Vd y SNOdYYZYH NON NI q31v9O 83Al3038S ONY AlddNS YAMOd MOV18 19 915 006 008 S3IN3S ia ek 7 AlddNS STVNIWS3L 01314 TWNOIS 91313 vi ET et TT OT e 8 2 9 t E 2 T ONIAVAT 371995 LON OC d SI 11 HOIHA 304 LVHL I c y 0 I 3SUdsfnd ANY 4134 035 YA HSINI 38 LON 5 3ON3ILJNU2 DAGTI Tv2vO2 13114493 NI 5 SI ONIAVeI IHL A ING CIN3 Cel3dIelelV3 AlddNS LV 40 5 G IJ3IHS SNDUILVOIIddV TIZMASNOH JO ALle3dUed JHL SI A 1 3195 X TWOISNISINI ui dE B3HIU A04 CNY ALIWAOANOO 32 A04 CAAINOJA SI IAIA 5 6 T WHO T 5531 LSAW HlVd 9 3Hl 40 3ONVISIS3M DSNIAVSG 1081 05 EE eund TERGUM FHL v0S 3121159 OZ 944
51. LNAWdINODS L9 9 SALUND HN INO I3133ANU2 83IS8V8 SNLVAVddV C4LVIOQUSS 41411449 VSO 6 ALON NOILVOO 1 51 2 lt 43 DMG evevOd 31143493 004040 2 ONIMVAC 31 535 LON DG 7 640 5 00 90 01 3190 2 AJJ Pasun y OMADUOH evcvUcls 5 jWA O00 ViWel 1900 42114 DU NLIILdU 4414 411348 000 NS O34 LAU moma vt en IV LN4AWdINOS 9 9 SJLILUND 43133AND2 33I3NV8 ADS LNOO SnliVelvddv 31 VIJIISSV 41411643 959 3l1lN5 A lddns jA 00 Vel 006 001 531435 eis 0 00515 4LVNasl IV 1N3NdIn893 Z 9 SILON 33 L3 3ANUD 33ISlalva EA JUS LND2 0194 449 031913055 3L311332 52 CIN 1100 lddflS e d Ld AW 00EYWA ALON SSV 19 1 234 dhe 559023 2489 I 55919 6 ASI 2 006 001 53514435 ANOASNIALNI SLIANDSAS SAVS ATIVOISNIALNI 000515 NDIILVOUI C IJIJISSV 122 SNUCAVZVH NOUILYOU SOBIEVZvHB INLEIN ET el TT OT 6 8 N Z LN 640 LHS 00 90 01 3190 2 AY 31 25 630 1 5 everoels vl ET 21935 LON DG V IS AA NI OH el 44341341 9 Z 9 9 SALON I31383ANU2 3I3INSV8 SNLVAVddV I31V
52. NEXT key to call up next configuration parameter Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 97 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 3 NONVOL Meett jeir Cjoin fii g Enters meter configuration function ENTER 5 WO IRIKITINIG and confirms that Local Smart Meter YES is present Timed prompt Proceed Co nifii g to Step 4 ATTENTION prompt No Meter Present appears prompt times out in a few seconds as described above and calls up the Configure Meter prompt This means that you can access the meter configuration function without the Local Smart Meter installed Proceed to Step 4 If prompt Mtr not Supportd appears prompt times out and returns to previous ST CONFIG prompt See Step 2 This means that you are working with a pre release 300 transmitter that does not support the Local Smart Meter option and therefore can not access the meter configuration function 4 Cclo n f i g Prompt asks if you want to configure flilglulrlel 4 Local Smart Meter If you want to configure it go to Step 5 If you do not want to configure it press CLR key to exit function Mle t le r P rlelslelnit
53. Procedure continued Table 40 starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 4 DE READ miale 1 101 111111111 Be sure any switches that may trip i 1 s E c u R E B alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 ENSE TT T T Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER is F c w o R k and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 PUN foje ITJA G NOI 111111 hion 6 m 1 111 1 T felt 13191111 Read present LRV setting 0 2 1991818 9511 G TRIM HT T elt 131611 Prompt asks if you want to set LRV applied pressure NON VOL RT T 1 felt 3s ep1 3 LRV is set to applied head pressure ENTER dtl 8 3 1 5 19151111 E 1 es 7 LL 111 T felt 13191111 Call up output for display OUT SIF ic WOIRIKITINIG PUT io u rT P 41 1 Pit 13161111 Read 0 output on display for 19411111 corresponding zero line pressure plus head pressure H For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output 8 Close plug C 9 Open valve D to begin measuring process line pressure 10 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to applied l
54. Silicone DC 200 Oil no greater than 22 feet 6 7 meters below the transmitter Silicone DC 704 Oil no greater than 19 feet 5 8 meters below the transmitter Chlorotrifluorethylene no greater than 11 feet 3 4 meters below the transmitter NOTE The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary head effect should not exceed 9 psi 300 mm Hg absolute Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Step Action 1 capillary tubing Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of If Transmitter Model Number is Then Connect Remote Seal on STR93D or STR12D high pressure HP side of transmitter to lower flange mounting on tank wall for variable head H1 STR13D low pressure LP side of transmitter to lower flange mounting on tank wall for variable head H1 ATTENTION On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 35 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Remote seal mounting continued Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter continued Step Action 3 If Transmitter Model Then Connect Remote Number is Seal on SI R93D or STR12D low pressure LP side of transmitter to upper flange mounting on tank wal
55. Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 5 13000 Pressure Transmitter F amily sacado Le duh 6 SPEC Model DIFIGF efle SU N 9 local Smart Meter Available 13 iO 16 Operating Temperature Limits Transmitters with Silicone Fill 0 20 Transmitter Overpressure S et RO hr inm etr eee 2 Installing and Charging SEC Battery Pack MD INE ARMS 22 Local Smart Meter Specifications In A do e hull se eae 24 Mounting 5 3000 Transmitter 10 4 Bracket E HR EE DU De ees 27 ZetoCorrecis Procedure 2 e nie 31 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal 35 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process 1 1 1 2 12400200 080880000000000000000000000004 38 5 debo
56. 11 1 1 1 TJT Acknowledge prompt and establish ENTER 51 communications with sample Yes transmitter PT 3011 to be calibrated 11111111 3 6 Adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to LRV 0 7 E CIRTVERIE T T Jetty TSTe n Present LRV setting If displayed pd 1 191 e e je e n 2 o 3 e F value does not match applied pressure key in matching LRV value or adjust pressure accordingly 8 RESET RT T 1 IPIT 13191111 Prompt asks if LRV is to be 111 calibrated to applied reference RECT pressure If it is to be calibrated go to next Step If it isn t press CLR key and try again Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 189 10 4 Calibrating Range with SFC continued Procedure continued Table 59 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 NON VOL HT T 1 3 211 71 Calibrates LRV to reference input ENTER 5 Iw o R K INIG pressure for zero calibration Yes It Pity 13101111 JCjOJR RJEJC T EID ETRE VE 1 310111 12 2 0 0 0 201 131918 10 Adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to URV 10096 11 F 111 T 1 13191111
57. 203 11 7 Checking SFC Display Keyboard ete nen ert tede 207 SECTION 12 PARTS LIS T5 axe SR gud a RE Er Id E E 209 12t Replacement ANS m UTE 209 SECTION 13 REFERENCE 8 2 02 212 1 231 153 0 MICI EAGAN Sac coste eso esto Pract 231 APPENDIX TABLE 1 OPTIONS IN MODEL NUMBER 233 5 P VER P 233 APPENDIX B FREEZE PROTECTION OF TRANSMITTERS 237 B 1 Possible Soldtiois M6ellboS utate en ces coset LL D E 237 APPENDIX C CONFIGURATION RECORD 251 APPENDIX D HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 1 253 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous 253 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations 259 0 3 Enclosure RAUNGS usui oett d uM dene 263 S 265 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual vii Figures Figure Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter
58. 6 There is a communication problem Correct any wiring resistance or check the power supply problems and try power and SFC connections Is the communicating again Press ID polarity correct red to positive and key black to negative If you are still not getting the correct e loop resistance Is there a minimum display note error messages of 250 ohms resistance between the refer to Troubleshooting section in SFC and the power supply this manual for probable cause power supply Is power applied is there greater than 11 volts at the transmitter and are you within the operating area on the curve in Figure 16 Continued on next page 52 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 5 2 Establishing Communications continued Starting communications continued Table 17 starting Communications with Transmitter continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 SHIFT DE READ Tale Njoj Nfof TT TT TTT TT 131399 ENOL 11111111 111111 Initiates shift key selection Begins upload of configuration database from transmitter Operation completion rate is shown in percent Note that display for ID response reverts to style used for transmitter in analog mode when upload is completed with transmitter and are ready to
59. 7 9 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter 131 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented 133 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized 136 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP 140 7 9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter 144 7 10 Pressure Measurement with AP 145 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote 147 SECTION 8 OPERATION 2 259053 SATIS US i uf tU LO 554523 2448 151 Sek ItOgUclloll 151 9 2 ACCESSING Operation dint eon tle onte ut ed x pace epe oben sole saecu boe esc sur uctus 152 8 3 Changing Default Failsafe 155 8 4 Writing Data iri Scratch Pad ATG8 ith di oreet nie alas bana 157 8 5 Saving and Restoring a 159 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter 163 SECTION 9 VIAINUEINAING 169 OM t 169 92
60. 8 N 7 9 DAGT6 IvevOc JIVI JALOND IN4Wd INOS L9 9 51116 HN INU GI3183ANUO 33TISIVED SNLVAVddV 31VIOUSSV I3AleddV ALILINA JAWS ALON J10N gt INAWdINOS L8 9 SALOND 0X INDJ 4 3L83ANU2 83IS8IV8 SNLVAVddY 31 VIJUSSV ALILIN3 ALON A Idas NOILVOU 1 SRQDOsVZVH NUN v 43 ONIMVAC 31935 LON NOISNAWIC av INONY HSINI3 2 2 0215 59 3495 ATIVOISNISLNI ONIAVa 46 81 6 16 21 06 ADNI 16 01 6 YONA WIAALVW 0015 0065 0006 15 48 5 _ Soyouy 0006 YWA 6 5399 5 5 5 8 538845 AW 0006 538845 0006 4 538845 WS 0006 VWa 2 538845 952 8405 Ajjorisujyzuy WS 0006 YW 9 51894845 6 01 9 518945 OY 519943 538845 44 8uiu1u8n 4 44 6 6 1 952 9395 192154143 1 006 001 Selves 000615 6 8 3LUN QNNOA9D IJIHS 3 AL33VS OISNISLNI 6 ALON LNAWdINDS TBNINDO L9 9 SJLUN 43183AND2 N3IS8IV8 SNLVAVddv CALVIOUSSV Cals Laso 4ALOND 2 adA Lld 1 819921291 IQ 219922292 51 A Vv ay SSJIJAVSVd ALIINJ SJOIAdQ 001 119
61. Process input for 4 mAdc 096 output Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set LRV to applied pressure URV Upper Range Value Process input for 20 mAdc 10096 output Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set URV to applied pressure Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 63 6 2 Overview Continued What to configure continued Table 20 summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters continued Configuration Data Setting or Selection The following parameters are for transmitters in DE mode of operation only Mode of Output Signal Indication Any one of these selections based on control system information needs single Range sends the PV value corresponding to the transmitter s working range PVw to the control system for display For systems using STDC card or STIMV module also called STIM Smart Transmitter Interface Module Dual Range STDC sends the PV values corresponding to the transmitter s full range PVt and working range PVw measurements to the control system for display For systems using STDC card only single Rng W SV sends PV value corresponding to the transmitter s working range PVw and temperature value from the transmitter s sensor to the control system for display For systems using STDC card or STIMV IOP module Message Format Choose one of these broadc
62. ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments continued Procedure continued Table 27 setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 9 a Press and hold SPAN button on Local Zero and Span assembly or Local Smart Meter Honeywell ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default unit of percent 96 during this operation If the error code Ero appears on the display you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span adjustments If the error code Er4 appears you are trying to set a SPAN value that is outside acceptable limits for your transmitter Readjust applied pressure to be within acceptable range limits and repeat this procedure b Press Increase A button once to complete this function ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1 2 second and then returns reading 100 Honeywell of 100 100 0 ANALOG Display goes blank for 1 2 second and returns with 100 reading c Check that milliammeter reading equals 20 mA and release SPAN button ATTENTION it milliammeter reading doesn t change be sure you are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local adjustments The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set engineering units after you release the SPAN button Contin
63. from nameplate plus R300 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without head GP AP Models 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Kit 30754154 002T Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except STG180 3 sets 30754154 0031 Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body 3 sets Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 219 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit K1 Nut hex metric M8 K2 O ring K3 Gasket Teflon for gasket only 30756445 502 narrow profile L P or 30756445 503 STG180 Gasket Viton for gasket only 30756445 504 narrow profile L P or 3 30756445 505 STG180 30753792 001 Bolts amp nuts kit all models narrow profile carbon steel K4 Bolt hex head metric M8 50 mm long 4 30753793 002 A286 SS NACE Bolts amp 302 304 SS NACE nuts kit all models narrow profile K1 Nut hex 5 16 316 stainless steel K4 Bolt hex head 5 16 18 Table 74 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body Material Fitting Size Models STA122 STA140 STG140 STG170 STG180 STA922 STA940 Carbon steel Series 100 9 16 1
64. percent e Display Retrieve and display data from the transmitter or SFC memory e Change Mode of Operation Tell transmitter to operate in either its analog 4 20 mA mode or its digital enhanced DE mode Continued on next page ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 1 3 Purpose of SFC continued SFC model differences Smart Field Communicator continued e Check Current Output Use the transmitter to supply the output current desired for verifying analog loop operation troubleshooting or calibrating other components in the analog loop e Troubleshoot Check status of transmitter operation and display diagnostic messages to identify transmitter communication or operator error problems As Honeywell s family of Smartline Transmitters has evolved the SFC has been changed to meet new model and functionality requirements Besides different software versions some major differences exist between these four SFC model designations e SIS100 e SISIOI e 515102 e SIS103 Table 2 summarizes the differences between the four SFC models for reference Table 2 SFC Model Differences If SFC Then it is compatible And additional functions model 5 with include STS100 Analog only ST 3000 smart Not applicable pressure transmitters STS101 Analog only ST 3000 smart Corrects Reset Failsafe Direction pressure transmitters if and Sensor Temperature SFC software ve
65. 015 310118 5 E JN SJOJRJ JOJV EJR T E MP 015 310111 CIR TI clayey 018 310111 18 1 111111111 Transmitter and SFC are operating normally Diagnostic message appears for detected fault Critical status appears followed by applicable diagnostic messages Signals end of status messages for display Press STAT key to display messages again When there are two or more messages they are cycled in display at 5 second intervals 202 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 11 6 Interpreting Messages Interpretation table Most of the diagnostic messages that can be displayed on the SFC are listed alphabetical order in Table 67 along with a description and suggested action to be taken Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table Message Possible Cause What to Do 5 015 310111 JFJAJUT T Characterization PROM is not functioning correctly Replace meter body 5 015 31011118 8 All calibration CORRECTS were deleted data was reset to default values Recalibrate transmitter ju TP faf 370111 elt No temperature compensation data exists fo
66. 18 110 XX x x Continued on next page 4 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Series and model number data continued ATTENTION Transmitter adjustments ST 3000 Transmitters presently available You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you have from the third and fourth digits in the key number The letter the third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types A Absolute Pressure D Differential Pressure F Flange Mounted G Gauge Pressure R Remote Seals The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter Series Thus a 1 means the transmitter is a Series 100 and a 9 is a Series 900 For a complete breakdown of the Table selections in your model number please refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide that 1s provided as a separate document However a description of the available Table III options is given in Appendix A of this manual for handy reference Previous models of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series 100 Series 100e Series 600 and Series 900 have been supplied at various times since the ST 3000 was introduced in 1983 While all these transmitters are functionally alike there are differences in housing and electronics design This manual only applies for Release 300 Series 100 transmitters with software vers
67. 375 inches lg 2 K2 Flange adapter 1 K3 Gasket 1 K4 Filter screen 1 30754419 007 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapter with carbon steel bolts 30754419 023 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapter with 316 st steel bolts K1 Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg 2 K2 Flange adapter 1 K3 Gasket 1 K5 30757503 001 Housing seal kit 1 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 225 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 64 High Temperature Meter Body 4 1 1 Sanitary Seal omall Flange NPT Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts Figure 64 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket 51204982 001 Sanitary Seal Head GP l Stainless Steel Head w st stl hardware 51204982 003 Sanitary Seal Head GP l Stainless Steel Head w SS NACE hardware 51204982 002 Sanitary Seal Head GP l Hastelloy Head w st stl hardware 51204984 001 Gasket includes Teflon gasket and Viton O ring Flange Adapter Not Shown 51204983 001 Flange adapter kit 51204983 002 Flange adapter kit 51204983 017 Flange adapter kit 51204983 018 Flange adapter kit 51204983 003 Flange adapter kit 51204983 004 Flange adapter kit 51204983 005 Flange adapter kit 51204983 006 Flange adapter kit 51204983 0
68. 4 NON VOL STOINTFIOTRIMH TTIYT T T T T T4 Conformity change is entered in SFC 5 11111 11 1 Prompt asks if you want to download D OIWINILIOJA D change to transmitter If you want to download change go to Step 5 If you do not want to download change press CLR key to return to initial prompt in Step 1 5 NON VOL STOINTFTOTRIMH TTIYT T T T T T4 Message exchange is working ENTER S F iC es 15111 01 1 111611 11 Output conformity is changed in c o N FJo RIM T YI 111 transmitter Press NEXT key to call up next parameter or CLR key to exit function Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 73 6 4 Selecting Output Form continued Keystroke summary About square root output Figure 27 shows keystroke summary for selecting output conformity for quick reference Figure 27 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity B CONF NON VOL Yes DE CONF MENU ITEM NON VOL Yes NON VOL ENTER Yes 22507 For differential pressure transmitters measuring the pressure drop across a primary element the flow rate 1s directly proportional to the square root of the differential or pressure drop The ST 3000 transmitter s output is automatically converted to equal percent of flow when its output conformity 1s configured as s
69. 51204983 016 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 3002 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 009 Flange adapter kit 1757 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 010 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 1508 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 021 Flange adapter kit 17 NPT st stl 1502 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 022 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 1508 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 011 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT Hastelloy 1508 w st stl bolts 51204983 012 1 1 1 1 1 1 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT Hastelloy 1502 st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 025 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 026 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 1508 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 037 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 1508 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 038 51204983 027 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 1508 w st stl bolts 51204983 028 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 1508 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 029 Flange adapter kit 1757 st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 030 1 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 3002 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 039 Flange adapter kit 172 st 51 3002 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 040 1 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 3002 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 031 Flange adapter kit 172 Hastelloy 300
70. ARES DAMEN NEM E 178 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode 185 Calibrating Measurement Range Wetter endless epa api 189 Reset ng Calibration Data With SEG Leere tte morena oe o Le eet oe en AERE OS 193 Clearing th 7 Symbol from the SEC 197 summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non Critical 94 199 summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures 200 summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors 200 summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry 201 summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC 201 a status Check WIL FC o erue avene RA FORE OR Een ie Ra Ee Dd 202 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Tables odio riecht eso tha ten tei odds oe ven REUS 203 Runnine SFC Display and Keyboard 55 2 eee ab NR IBN 207 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts 211 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 55 and 56 213 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 0222
71. C uUTNT1TTIsT 111 TPIT 13101111 11111111 1 2 inches of water at 68 F 20 C 91 111151 13101111 11111114 2 01 1618 millimeters of mercury at 0 C 111 Jet 13191111 32 F 11111111 81961 pounds per square inch LL tT tt LL LIPSII ILI A kilopascals EBBNEBBNEBGZUCEEEEN megapascals 13 310111 11111111 11111 millibar 0 117118 1 310111 11111111 11 0 117118 13 310111 11111111 11111 grams per square centimeter 91 1111151 111 PIT 13101111 11111111 161 1618 211 kilograms per square centimeter u N 17157 J1 PIT 13101111 11111111 KS Continued on next page 78 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 6 Selecting Unit of Measurement continued Procedure continued Table 24 Pre Programmed Engineering Units for Selection continued IF you want LRV etc displayed in D THEN sequentially press key until display shows inches of mercury at 32 F 0 C YIN TIS 11 310111 21111111 141312 millimeters of water at 4 C 39 2 F YING TIS 11 310111 21111111 210 4 Je meters of water at 4 C 39 2 F YING TIS 11 310111 21111111 normal atmoshperes 11118 1 300111 211111 III inches of w
72. Check transmitter nameplate for model number data 5 015 JRJEJSIJPJOIN S E Transmitter sent a negative response because it could not process one or more commands Check configuration and try again Continued on next page 204 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 11 6 Interpreting Messages continued Interpretation table continued Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table continued Message Possible Cause What to Do NIO Noresponse from transmitter Try communicating again R E s Plo N s E Could be transmitter or loop Press Ib key and do any failure corrective action required and try again e Check that transmitter s loop integrity has been maintained that SFC is connected properly and that loop resistance is at least 250 15 P T 3 0 1 11 SFC s CPU is misconfigured Replace SFC _ 81 1 S A v E R E s T O R E database restore one or Nothing SFC tried to restore as io P T OIN M r s M A T C H more options do not match much of database as possible IS A v E R E s T O R E Database restore function failed Check transmitter and try again JR JEJS T OJR E JFJAJTIt E D 51 19151 IPIT 3 o 1 1 Meter body te
73. D 3 CENELEC LCIE Certification Flameproof Supply x 45 Vdc IP 66 67 EEx IIC T6 Intrinsically Safe EEx T5 40 x Ta lt 93 Flameproof Supply x 45 Vdc 66 67 EEx d IIC T6 LCIE Intrinsic Safety Parameters o 42 0mA E 1 2W I 4 2 nF Li GENE TN m no integral indicator or with integral Smart Meter option SM Li 150 uH With Analog Meter option ME 1 Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204243 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 261 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations continued Certification and Conformity Details continued Table D 4 Standards Australia LOSC Certification Intrinsically Safe Ex ia T4 Class Zone 0 Flameproof Ex d IIC T6 Class Zone 1 Non Sparking Apparatus Type of Protection n Ex n IIC T6 Class Zone 2 LOSC Intrinsic Safety Parameters en 1 2 W S 7 0 4 2 nF With no integral indicator or with integral Smart Meter option SM 1 Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204309 Table D 5 Zone 2 Europe Declaration of Conformity Electrical Apparatus With Type of Protection n per IEC 79 15 IP 66 67 Ex Il 3 GD T X Council Directive 94 9 EC 40 lt Ta lt 93 C Zone 2 Parameters U lt 42V lt 22 mA Temp Code T4 at 93 C Maximum Ambient Temp Code 07 T5 at 80 C Maximum Ambie
74. Level Measurement Pressurized Tank Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals About this section This section identifies typical startup tasks associated with several generic pressure measurement applications It also includes the procedure for running an optional analog output check 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 123 7 2 Startup Tasks About startup Procedure reference Once you have installed and configured a transmitter you are ready to start up the process loop Startup usually includes e Applying process pressure to the transmitter e Checking zero input and e Reading input and output You can also run an optional output check to ring out an analog loop prior to startup The actual steps 1n a startup procedure will vary based on the type of transmitter and the measurement application In general we use the SFC to check the transmitter s input and output under static process conditions and make adjustments as required before putting the transmitter into full operation with the running process Choose the applicable procedure to reference in this section from Table 37 based on your type of transmitter and the measurement application The reference procedure will give you some
75. Manifold Piping 37 Turndown Ratio 76 U Unit of Measurement 63 URV Upper Range Value 63 V Vibration Sources 9 Wiring Connections 44 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections 55 7 Zero and Span Adjust Options 3 Zero corrects 3 Zero shift 50 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 267 268 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 READER COMMENTS Honeywell s Automation College welcomes your comments and suggestions to improve future editions of this and other publications You can communicate your thoughts to us by either of the following By Telephone By Fax By E Mail By Mail Title of Publication Publication Number Writer Comments Recommendations Name Title Company Address City In the U S A use our toll free number 1 800 822 7673 available the 48 contiguous states except Arizona in Arizona dial 1 602 863 5558 Dial 1 602 313 4842 College Automation Honeywell com Use this form detach fold tape closed and mail to us We would like to acknowledge your comments please include your complete name and address ST 3000 R300 User s Manual Date 7 00 34 ST 25 14B Dave Taunton Date State Zip If returning by mail please tape closed Postal regulations prohibit use of staples Communications concerning technical publications should be directed to Automation College Industrial
76. Meter if 6 11 or 6 12 applicable 13 Write data in scratch pad 8 4 memory if desired 14 Store all changes in the 6 13 transmitter s non volatile memory by pressing SHIFT and ENTER 16 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 3 Preinstallation Considerations 3 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction CE Conformity Europe Notice Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter Considerations for SFC Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option About this section This section reviews things you should take into consideration before you install the transmitter and start using the SFC Of course if you are replacing an existing ST 3000 transmitter and you did not order a new SFC you can skip this section 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 17 3 2 CE Conformity Europe Notice About conformity and special conditions ATTENTION This product 1s in conformity with the protection requirements of 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual and the following special conditions may invalidate this product s conformity with the EMC Directive e You must use shielded twisted pair cable such as Belden 9318 for all signal power wiring e You m
77. Model STS103 User s Manual 33 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued High Temperature You can mount the High Temperature transmitter directly to the process Transmitter Mounting flange connection or the process piping Figure 12 shows typical pipe and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison To mount a flange mounted transmitter model mounted bolt the transmitter s flange to the flange on the wall of the tank or process pipe Tighten the bolts to a torque of 47 4 to 54 2 N m 35 to 40 Ib ft Once the transmitter 18 mounted the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position See Table 9 step 4 ATTENTION On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Figure 12 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations Tank Wall Flange Transmitter Connection Flange Process Pipe 1 2 NPT Connection Continued on next page 34 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Remote seal Use the procedure in Table 11 to mount a remote diaphragm seal mounting transmitter model Figure 13 shows a typical installation for a remote diaphragm seal transmitter for reference WARNING Mount the transmitter flanges within the limits stated here for the given fill fluid in the capillary tubes with a tank at one atmosphere IF the fill fluid is THEN mount the flange
78. NON VOL Confirms that TRIPS are secured Go Required for transmitters operating ENTER to Step 5 for display response in analog mode only Yes Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 51 5 2 Establishing Communications continued Starting communications continued Table 17 starting Communications with Transmitter continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 1 101 111111111 Message exchange is taking place s F c 0 1 6 1 1 Note that communications with transmitter are blocked until ID key is pressed D P Tlale Transmitter is in analog transmission Ll LE B B B BL IG BJ 1l mode LIN means transmitter is set for linear output instead of square OR root SQRT DP means transmitter is differential pressure type instead of gauge pressure GP or absolute pressure AP Last eight columns in bottom row are blank when no tag number has been assigned to this transmitter Go to E x M T T A G Transmitter is in digital DE e E transmission mode Last eight columns in bottom row are blank OR when no tag number has been assigned to this transmitter Go to Step 7 THATS 8 81 Communication error messages cycled at two second intervals and display returns to initial prompt Go to Step 6
79. OT 6 8 20 2 9 v T 006 001 531435 DNIAVe G 31935 LON DG d 729 Z a0 T LHS JU T LHS 0020 Nu ANON 3735 31925 5 29 SI 11 HOIHA 214 19 2 c c 1 Heint M3HlDU 3SOdaNd ANY 4 0350 25 LON 5 ANY 014 2 NI 83114405 SI 9NIAVe 3HL IAA3NUH 30 143 4 JHL SI J3 I3N32 3J4VS ATIVOISNIALNI 7E ONIAVSC JO LHOISAdUJ JHL WALNOD 66 2 WISSLVW 2 1 NSHLO 30 C3CN3AWUO33 ANY ALIWSUJND2 33 3414 CAXINOAN SI IAIM 13 5 79 gt 0075 0065 000615 66 22 var 5 BV3NI WHO 5531 38 LSNW 66 22 4 JA HlVd CNnDS9 Hl3V3 JU 32 9151534 JHL 5105 N34d wad 310312373 HlNV3 37991105 V OL G3L93NNUO 38 LSNW 5 319998 03191061 ATTWOINVA 1VD NDN S INSWdINOS SIHL ONITIVLSNI NIHA G3AUTIDJ 38 LSAW ONIA V3SI NULLVTTVLSNI 5 3 129 4 a3INSVE 131311432 2313 32 38 LSNW Se3INNVH v EET CwVAlBddv 3121 G3lllWs3d SI ONIMVAG SIHL OL NOISIASA ON es sac eek ed yI 62009 66006 8 CW 40 SNUILNDd 319917999 3ONVGNOIDV NI 38 LSNW NULLVTTIVISNI 72 JW L svaeus AW 0006 532945 ISTWIO3dS S wAUBddV UNE AW 000 9 siaeus WS 000
80. Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter E 133 Figure 42 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized Tank 202000024400 0 000000000000 136 Figure 43 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter 140 Figure 44 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP TypeTransmitter 140 Figure 45 Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter 144 Figure 46 Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter 144 Figure 47 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter 145 viii ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Figures Figure 48 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter with Remote Seals eter rope coepto ipae et nb saa Ut Quo ens 147 Figure 49 Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper on PWA ssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene enne nnn nnne eene nnns 156 Figure 50 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function eese 159 Inoue sb Display Wath XILIBdICatots DE 554655 o cvs tate
81. Present URV setting If displayed 121010 j H 2 o s e F value does not match applied pressure key in matching URV value or adjust pressure accordingly before you press CORRECT key in next step 12 RESET RT T T felt 13191111 Prompt asks if URV is to be COR cjo R R E c T 9 8 21 calibrated to applied reference RECT pressure If it is to be calibrated go to next Step If it isn t press CLR key and try again 13 NON VOL RT T TF felt 13191111 Calibrates URV to reference input ENTER 5 IwloiRIiKkiiNIe pressure for span 100 Yes calibration p inim 13191111 ty Pity 13101111 121912 210 1 2191 131915 14 1111 1 felt 13181111 Initiate shift key selection SHIFT 21111 Saves data in transmitter s nonvolatile memory This takes 15 NIG approximately 8 seconds 1 Pi 13101111 OJAI TIAL 0 m 5 2 12 HB gt Yes LfN oje 11111111 1 Continued next page 190 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 10 4 Calibrating Range with SFC continued Procedure continued Figure 52 Typical Calibration Hookup ST 3000 Low Pressure Head DVM See NOTES Dead Weight Tester
82. Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 13 1 5 Local Smart Meter Options continued About the options Each Local Smart Meter and or Zero and Span Adjust option comes as a separate assembly mounted on the transmitter s Printed Wiring Assembly PWA mounting bracket The meter option assembly includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the transmitter s PWA A meter end cap which includes a window is supplied on the electronics side of the transmitter s housing so you can view the meter display with the end cap installed See Figure 6 Figure 6 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option Electronics Housing Local Smart Meter Option 14 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 2 Quick Start Reference 2 1 Introduction Section Contents About this section This section includes these topics Section See Page 2 1 Introduction 2 2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On Line Quickly This section assumes that the ST 3000 transmitter has been installed and wired correctly and 1s ready to be put into operation It also assumes that you are somewhat familiar with using the SFC and that the transmitter has been configured correctly for your application If the transmitter has not been installed and wired you are not familiar with SFC operation and or you do not know if the transmitter is configured correctly please read the other sections of
83. ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Summary continued Barriers can be installed per manufacturer s instructions for transmitters to be used in intrinsically safe applications Figure 17 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Block Electronics Electronics Terminal Terminal Housing Block Housing Block Internal Internal Ground Ground Terminal Terminal 3 Screw Terminal Block 5 Screw Terminal Block Lightning Protection Option LP TPS reference Transmitters that are to be digitally integrated to Honeywell s TPS system will be connected to the Smart Transmitter Interface Module in the Process Manager Advanced Process Manager or High Performance Process Manager through a Field Termination Assembly Details about the TPS system connections are given in the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration Manual PM12 410 which 1s part of the TDC 3000 system bookset Allen Bradley PLC If you are digitally integrating the ST 3000 to an Allen Bradley PLC the same FTA and wiring procedures used with Honeywell s TPS system are also used with the Allen Bradley 1771 and 1746 platforms For more information contact ProSoft Technology Inc 800 326 7066 or http www psft com Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 43 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Wiring connections The procedure in Table 16 shows the s
84. See NOTES NOTES The digital voltmeter must have a 0 02 accuracy or better The calibration standard input source must have a 0 02 accuracy The 250 ohm resistor must have a 0 0196 tolerance or better 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 191 10 5 Background Resetting Calibration You can erase incorrect calibration data by resetting the data to default values through the SFC The default values return the transmitter calibration to the original factory characterization values Characterization calculates a mathematical model of the performance of the transmitter s sensors and then stores that data 1n the transmitter s memory Note that this is not the final calibration which is done at the end of the process against the ordered range While resetting the calibration will return the transmitter to a close approximation of the previous calibration using its stored characterization data the accuracy of the reset transmitter will be lower than the specified final calibrated accuracy The calibration 18 not exact since the transmitter mounting angle may be different than the factory mounting angle This means that the transmitter 1s calculating its output based on the characterization equation alone without any compensation for the small residual errors of zero offset and span correction For example a typical zero offset correction is less than 0 1 1nH5O for a 400 1nH5O range and a typi
85. Style B 30753046 501 LCD assembly 1 Interface cable assembly with alligator clips 1 30752453 501 6 feet 1 8 meters long 30752453 503 12 feet 3 6 meters long 30752453 505 20 feet 6 meters long 4 Interface cable assembly with EZ hooks 1 30752453 502 6 feet 1 8 meters long 30752453 504 12 feet 3 6 meters long 30752453 506 20 feet 6 meters long 30752438 501 DC battery charger AA Nicad cell 120 Vac 1 30753739 501 DC battery charger AA Nicad cell 240 Vac Universal European plug 1 30752834 501 Carrying case vinyl 1 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Kit 30753194 001 Replacement hardware kit K1 Bumper recess 4 K2 Screw metric M3 socket head 6 K3 Cover battery compartment 1 K4 Label battery cover 1 K6 Carry strap 1 K7 Harness assembly power charger 1 K10 Actuator 1 K12 Socket head wrench kit metric 1 Contents 1 Hex head socket wrench size 2 5 mm 1 Hex head socket wrench size 3 mm 1 Hex head socket wrench size 4 mm Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 229 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 81 summary of Recommended Spare Parts Reference Spares for Part Number Description Figure Key 1 10 10 100 100 Nmbr Nmbr Units Units 1000 Units Electronics Housing Assembly Figs 55 and 56 51309397 501 Electronics Module Assembly 55 5 1 1 2 2 4 3075750
86. VOL ENTER Yes 58 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 6 Configuration 6 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page 6 1 Introduction 6 2 Overview 6 3 Entering a Tag Number 6 4 Selecting Output Form 6 5 Adjusting Damping Time 6 6 Selecting Unit of Measurement 6 Setting Range Values Using SFC 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only 6 10 Selecting Message Format DE Mode Only 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons 6 13 Disconnecting SFC About this section This section introduces you to ST 3000 transmitter configuration It identifies the parameters that make up the transmitter s configuration database and provides procedures for entering values selections for the given configuration parameters If you will be using the SCT 3000 software Release 3 12 2 or greater instead of an SFC to configure the transmitter follow the SCT 3000 on line help and on line documentation to configure the transmitter s database 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 59 6 2 Overview About configuration ATTENTION Each ST 3000 Transmitter includes a configuration database which defines its particular operating characteristics You can use an SFC to change selected parameters within a given
87. and washers provided If transmitter is Then DP type with double ended use alternate mounting process heads and or holes in end of heads remote seals GP and AP with single use mounting holes in side ended head of meter body In line GP use smaller U bolt LGP model provided to attach meter body to bracket See figure below Dual head GP and AP use mounting holes in end of process head Example LGP model transmitter mounted to optional angle mounting bracket LGP Models Meter Body Use bracket for hexagonal meter body NOTE If the meter body is hexagonal you must use the additional bracket supplied If meter body is round discard the bracket Continued on next page 28 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Bracket mounting continued Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket continued 4 Loosen set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn Rotate electronics housing a maximum of 180 degrees in left or right direction from center to the position you require and tighten set screw 13 to 15 Ib in 1 46 to 1 68 N m Example Rotating electronics housing 4 4 Electronics Housing 180 degrees max Set Screw 180 degrees max 2 ATTENTION The metric socket head wrench kit supplied with the SFC includes 2 5 3 and 4mm size
88. electronics housing However there are alternate wiring methods for connecting an analog meter remotely with the loop wiring Section 13 in this manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting an analog meter to Release 300 transmitters SM 3000 Smart Meter Connections The smart meter 3 wires can be connected remotely to a Release 300 transmitter Section 13 this manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting this smart meter to Release 300 transmitters New Smart Meter Connections The new integral smart meter 8 wires is connected directly to the transmitter s PWA and 1s mounted to the electronics module assembly inside the electronics housing The new integral smart meter 1s designed for the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitter and provides functionality not available with other smart meter designs NOTE Only one smart meter should be installed integrally to the transmitter Be aware that the RMA 300 remote meter does not have custom and flow units capability like the new smart meter Therefore if you use a local smart meter that 15 configured to display readings in custom or flow units in conjunction with an RMA 300 remote meter the readings of the two meters will be in different units 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 48 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 5 Getting Started 5 1 Introduction Section Content
89. formula to calculate pressure See section 6 7 in this manual LRV in inH2O for details on keying in a range value LRV H2x S x 1 Go to Step 8 H2 Height of fixed reference leg in inches 5 Specific gravity of remote seal fill fluid 1 Required for LRV calculation since pressure is on low side of meter body Example If H2 equaled 12 feet and the fill fluid was silicone oil substituting into the formula yields LRV 12 ft x 12 in x 0 94 x 1 LRV 135 36 inH2O ATTENTION specific gravity of silicone oil fill fluid is 0 94 and florolube fill fluid is 1 84 Continued on next page 148 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals Continued Procedure continued Table 45 starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 6 m EIRTVERIE T T Jetty 13191111 Read present LRV setting 0 1S 0010101 H 2 0 3 9 F Prompt asks if you want to set LRV 2 EYRE 13101111 to applied pressure 11 151 11 NON VOL LRV is set to fixed reference leg 13101311 pressure H2 times specific gravity of Wes quid end or pressure on low side of meter body 7 111 T
90. idea of the typical tasks associated with starting up a transmitter a given application Table 37 startup Procedure Reference IF transmitter type AND application 15 THEN reference 5 procedure in section Differential Flow Measurement 7 4 Pressure DP Pressure Measurement 1 9 Liquid Level Measurement 7 6 for Vented Tank with Dry Reference Leg Liquid Level Measurement 7 7 for Pressurized Tank with Liquid Filled Reference Leg Gauge Pressure Pressure or Liquid Level 7 8 Measurement Flush Mount Pressure or Liquid Level 7 9 Measurement Absolute Pressure Pressure Measurement 7 10 DP with Remote Liquid Level Measurement 7 11 Seals These applications also apply for flange mounted liquid level type transmitters that are usually mounted directly to a flange at the zero level of the tank These applications also apply for GP and AP type transmitters equipped with remote seals However you can only confirm that input pressure correlates with transmitter output in processes using remote seal connections 124 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 3 Running Analog Output Check Background ATTENTION You can put the transmitter into a constant current source mode to checkout other instruments in the loop such as recorders controllers and positioners Using the SFC you can tell the transmitter to change its output
91. if needed 11 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 135 7 7 Procedure Figure 42 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank The procedure in Table 42 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter a liquid level measurement application for a pressurized tank with a liquid filled wet reference leg Refer to Figure 42 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized Tank M Valve B Plug D Y Plug C at zero level Valve A b H4 Tap location at the minimum level to be measured Differential Pressure Transmitter 46 HP side of transmitter ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 42 we are assuming that e The tank is empty and the reference leg 15 filled e The high pressure HP side of the transmitter is connected to the wet reference leg Note that the transmitter will work 1f the HP side is connected to the bottom of the tank but not within the guaranteed accuracy specifications The transmitter is mounted below the zero level of the tank so h is greater than zero If h equals zero plug C 18 eliminated from the piping and the LP vent is
92. initiate other SFC operations 8 F S DIR iti 5171 111915111111111 Initiates status check STAT 5 WOIRIKITINIG If messages other than this one are wer dara cycled refer to the Troubleshooting section in this manual for an explanation of the message the probable cause and any corrective action IE 1 1 g 1 11 Signals end of status messages for IRE jajo display ATTENTION When assigned the transmitter s tag number also appears in the top row of the display 9 You have established communications 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 53 5 3 Making Initial Checks Checking mode and Before doing anything else it is a good idea to confirm the transmitter s software mode of operation and identify the version of software being used in the SFC and the transmitter Table 18 outlines the steps for quickly checking the transmitter s mode of operation and software versions of the SFC and the transmitter Table 18 Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software Versions Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 LJ ITN T 15111 30210 Initiates shift key selection Note that IT 51 111 111 1111 1 transmitter tag number ST 3000 in top row is used for example A DE purposes only Q e Asks if you want to change to DE 0 DIEI 11111 digita
93. input zero correct function using the SFC and following the steps below This corrects the transmitter for any minor error that may occur after the mounting bolts are tightened Initiate shift key selection Press key INPUT J OUT Press LE key Read applied input pressure RESET K COR Press 2 key Prompt asks if the applied input pressure equals zero input If it is zero input go to next keystroke If it is not press CLR key to exit function and repeat keystrokes NON VOL ENTER Yes Press 2 key Zero input is set equal to applied input pressure Remove the tube from between the input connections the power and the digital voltmeter or SFC Continue with the remaining installation tasks Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 31 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Flange mounting To mount a flange mounted model bolt the transmitter s flange to the flange pipe on the wall of the tank Tighten the bolts to a torque of 47 4 to 54 2 N m 35 to 40 Ib ft ATTENTION On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Figure 10 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange on the high pressure HP side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact with the process fluid The low pressure LP side of the transmitter is vented to atmosphere no connection Figure 10 Typica
94. limit time out after 30 seconds the meter discards both newly set values and reverts back to the previously set values If you have not yet set the upper display limit value the meter automatically enters the upper display setting function after it displays previously set value if applicable Go to Table 36 Honeywell 10 00 ANALOG 1 digit is BLANK or 1 10 00 ANALOG Press to set 1 digit as BLANK Press to set 1 digit as 1 Sign segment setting Honeywell van VV v of 100 10 00 ANALOG Press to set sign segment as BLANK for positive values Press to set sign segment as minus sign for negative values Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 113 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display The procedure in Table 36 outlines the steps for setting the upper display Values limit to represent the 100 percent URV output of the transmitter This procedure applies only for Flow units GPM or GPH in a transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for linear or square root output conformity Table 36 setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper If upper limit display value was previously set display limit setting function KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value flashes i
95. m M8 x 1 25 18 to 19 Ib ft N A 24 4 to 25 8 m 5 16 x 18 N A 13 to 14 Ib ft 17 6 to 19 m 174 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 9 4 Replacing PWA About the PWA The circuitry in the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters 1s of the single Electronics Board PWA design The PWA contains connectors for the flex tape conductor from the sensor the loop power wires and a connector for the optional smart meter cable Procedure The procedure in Table 55 outlines the steps for replacing the PWA Table 55 Replacing PWA Step Action 1 Turn OFF transmitter power ATTENTION we recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart 2 Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of transmitter housing We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling 4 the PWA since electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit 4155 components 3 lf equipped with a Local Smart Meter carefully turn Smart Meter counterclockwise to remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly e Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from housing e Using the retaining clip unplug flex tape connector and 2 wire power connector from PWA and remove PWA PWA and Flex Tape Connector Transmit
96. opened instead Continued on next page 136 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank continued Procedure continued Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close block off valves A and B See Figure 42 for sample piping arrangement 3 Open plugs C and D Allow system to stabilize at head pressure 4 Be sure any switches that may trip T RI Pls 5 1 0 212 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 TT T T Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER IS F c 0 and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 peje TIAIG No 111111 f lel 6 RT T T spen FT Read present LRV setting 0 2 12 019 19 H 2 0 3 9
97. optional Local Smart Meter 1s stored in a memory located on the transmitter s PWA If a database save and restore is done with the SFC then the meter configuration is restored along with the transmitter configuration Figure 50 shows a graphical summation of the save and restore database function Figure 50 summary of Save and Restore Database Function Saved Configuration Database Restored Configuration Database ____ ID Output Form LINEAR Output Form LINEAR Damping Time Damping Time 35 0 psi 200 0 psi 200 0 psi Output Signal Mode SINGLE RNG Output Signal Mode SINGLE RNG 6 BYTE Message Format 6 BYTE Failsafe Mode Read only Failsafe Mode Read Only Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 159 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database continued Procedure The procedure in Table 49 outlines the steps for saving a database from one transmitter and restoring it in another Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring for Be sure to put analog loop into transmitter with database to be saved manual mode and turn it on 2 EE TTA 18101 11111111 Be sure any switches that may trip 8 15 1 9 012171 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3
98. piping but this practice is only common with liquid level applications involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1 2 1nch impulse lines Use a tank mounted flanged seal in such installations Otherwise it 1s more desirable to keep the capillary lengths short the transmitter accessible for maintenance and for flow applications the normal 3 valve manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks Thus the impulse lines valving and diaphragm seals with 1 2 inch connections would be electrically or steam traced with high temperature steam permitted without damage to the transmitter See Figures B 4 and B 5 for typical piping layouts Figure B 4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals The impulse piping 3 valve manifold and upper flanges of the metal diaphragm seals must be insulated and where required also heated by electric or steam 1 2 3 valve manifold standard type with suitable temperature rating Differential pressure transmitter with metal diaphragm seals L Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 241 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Mechanical diaphragm seals continued Electric heating Figure B 5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal Impulse p
99. pressure high pressure applications applications 1 22518 GP AP Process Head e For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual head design see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters in Step 8 7 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti seize compound such as Neverseize or equivalent Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 179 9 5 Replacing Meter Body continuec Procedure continued Table56 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step Action 8 Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new meter body Finger tighten nuts Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter Meter Body Nuts Flex Tape O ring Process head Process head 9 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration Tighten head bolts in stages of 1 3 full torque 2 3 full torque and then full torque Always tighten head bolts in sequence shown and in these 10 gt stages gt 1 1 3 full torque 3 Full torque TO 2 2 2 3 full torque 22519 Continued on next page 180 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 9 5 Replacing Meter Body continued Procedure continued Table56 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step Action 10 Feed flex tape on new meter body through n
100. proportional to the measured variable over a 4 to 20 milliampere two wire loop Its major components are an electronics housing and a meter body as shown in Figure for a typical differential pressure model transmitter Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter Electronics Housing Meter Body The ST 3000 can transmit its output either an analog 4 to 20 milliampere format or a digital DE protocol format for direct digital communications with our TPS system Allen Bradley PLCs and other control systems Continued on next page ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued About the transmitter Besides the process variable PV output the transmitter also provides continued its meter body temperature as a secondary variable which is only available as a read only parameter through the SFC when the transmitter 18 in its analog mode See Figure 2 Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation Factory Characterization Data Electronics Housing Meter Body DP or PP Sensor Proportional 4 to 2 an 20 mA PV output Static Pressure Digital signal Sensor imposed during SFC communications Modular Electronics Terminal Block Pressure When the transmitter 1s 1n its DE mode the proc
101. resetting calibration to default values as a quick alternative to measurement range calibration 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 183 10 2 Overview About calibration ATTENTION Test Equipment The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter does not require recalibration at periodic intervals to maintain accuracy If a recalibration 1s required we recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter removed from the process and located in a controlled environment to get the best accuracy If the transmitter will be operating the analog mode you must calibrate its output signal before you calibrate the transmitter s measurement range using the SFC While it 1s not required to calibrate the output signal first for transmitter s operating in the DE mode you can do it by using the SFC to read the output in percent You can also use the SFC to reset the calibration data to default values if it is corrupted until the transmitter can be recalibrated See Table 59 in this section for details If the transmitter 1s digitally integrated with our TPS system you can initiate range calibration and calibration reset functions through displays at the Universal Station GUS and Allen Bradley PLCs However we still recommend that you do a range calibration using an SFC with the transmitter removed from service and moved to a controlled environment Details about doing a calibration reset through the Universa
102. this manual before starting up your transmitter This section provides a list of typical start up tasks and tells you where you can find detailed information about performing the task 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 15 2 2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On Line Quickly Quick start up tasks Table 4 lists common start up tasks for an ST 3000 transmitter using an SFC and gives an appropriate section in this manual to reference for more information about how to do the task The start up tasks are listed in the order they are commonly completed Table 4 Start up Tasks Reference Task Description Reference Section 1 Put analog loop into manual Appropriate vendor documentation mode for controller or recorder used as a receiver in analog loop with ST 3000 transmitter 2 Connect SFC to transmitter and 5 2 establish communications 3 Check or set tag ID 6 3 4 Identify transmitter s mode of 9 9 operation 5 Change mode of operation if 5 4 required 6 Check set output form 6 4 Linear Square Root 7 Check set damping time 6 5 8 Check set Lower Range Value 6 7 See 6 8 for local zero and and Upper Range Value span adjustments 9 Run optional output check for 753 analog loop 10 Check zero input and set if 7 4 See Step 9 in Table 39 required 7 8 See Step 9 in Table 43 11 Check transmitter status 8 2 12 Setup local Smart
103. this type system 1s more complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss upstream of the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the steam water interface It could occur within the heater coil or further up the steam line thus affecting the heating efficiency within the insulated enclosure Therefore steam control of materials which freeze or become too viscous above 100 F 38 C should probably not be attempted without some experimenting with the specific piping layout used Uncontrolled steam heating even with the best pressure regulation and desuperheating of steam should not be used to maintain transmitter temperatures above 100 F 38 C since this type of fixed Btu input must either over or under heat under normal ambient swings As with electric heating there are many types of commercial steam heating units available such as radiant heaters hollow meter body studs or just tubing lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body The same precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 245 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Steam heating continued see Figure B 8 and B 9 for typical piping installations Table B 1 summarizes the temperature ranges for the various freeze protection systems Table B 1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems
104. to configuration parameter No 5 JRJEJS TJ OJRJE menu selection 25 CLR LJ TIN P T 3 0 1 1 Exit configuration and verify that No transmitters ID now reflects ID from restored database Tag number PT 3011 is used for example purposes only Change tag number and other configuration data as required 162 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display Display description Figure 51 shows a Local Smart Meter display with all its indicators and segments lit for reference and Table 50 gives a brief description of what the indications mean Figure 51 Display With All Indicators Lit Honeywell wv 0 100 FLOW OUTPUT MODE ANALOG In H 2 CHECK STATUS GPH mmHg KNOWN VALUE GPM PSI A Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51 Display Indicator What It Means When Lit 17 Segment Bargraph Gives a gross indication of the transmitter s PV output from O to 100 Digital Readout Gives an indication of the transmitter s PV output in either percent of span or actual engineering units The display range is 19 990 000 and it is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible within the limits of the display A second decimal place expands the precision of range values within 19 99 to 1 100th of a unit Digi
105. to initiate upper value setting Magnitude range selections with largest range selected Honeywell v 00 19990 ANALOG Press and hold to scroll backward through selections Press and hold to scroll forward through selections 199 9 1999 19 99K 199 9K 1999K 19990K K multiplier indicator appears below the digital reading on the display Readout goes blank except for first active digit which will be 0 unless upper value was set before Honeywell wv v v 00 00 ANALOG Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 115 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase A button to select the next available digit value or Decrease W button to select the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired value is on display use 9 for example purposes 00 90 ANALOG K Press and hold to scroll backward through values Press and hold to scroll forward through values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in first digit and activate next active digit Readout now displays next active digit which Honeywell will be zero unless upper value was set before Press Increase A button to select the next available digit value or Decrease
106. transmitter tag number ST 3000 in top row is used for example A DE purposes only e 424 Asks if you want to change to DE cjHjNIG Tjo DIEI digital mode If you want to change mode go to Step 2 If you do not want to change mode press CLR key to exit function 101 sit 316 010 Asks if you want to change to analog 1 016171 mode If you want to change mode go to Step 2 If you do not want to change mode press CLR key to exit function 2 NON VOL opel T 1 18111 13181816 Prompt asks for confirmation of ENTER vjo u s ujnjgE mode change es 3 NON VOL ope T 1 1 18111 13161816 Message exchange is working ENTER S F C 11 161 1 1 11 es 01 18111 Ialele e Mode of operation is now DE 0 JXIMTIR digital OR 01 18111 Ialelele Mode of operation is now analog 20161 T lole 3 91619 Ready for next function 1 1 1 1111111 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 57 5 4 Changing Mode of Operation continued Keystroke summary Figure 22 shows keystroke summary for changing mode of operation for quick reference Figure 22 Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode of Operation DE Q SHIFT 44 NON VOL ENTER Yes NON
107. used for the approval body safety calculations The overpressure rating 1s the maximum pressure that may be applied during service or cleaning without damage to the transmitter Transmitter Type Transmitter Overpressure Ratings Upper Range Limit URL Maximum Working Pressure Rating Overpressure Rating Draft Range 10 inches H5O 25 mbar 50 psi 3 5 bar 50 psi 3 5 bar No overpressure protection is provided Differential Pressure Gauge Pressure 400 inches 1 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 100 psi 7 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 100 psi 7 bar 100 psi 7 bar 150 psi 10 3 bar 300 psi 21 bar 300 psi 21 bar 450 psi 31 bar 500 psi 35 bar 500 psi 35 bar 750 psi 52 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 4500 psi 310 bar 6000 psi 415 bar 6000 psi 415 bar 9000 psi 620 bar Absolute Pressure 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar Full vacuum to 1550 mmHg Absolute 2 bar 500 psia 35 bar 500 psia 35 bar 750 psia 52 bar NOTE To convert bar values to kilopascals kPa multiply by 100 For example 3 5 bar equals 350 kPa 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 21 3 4 Considerations for SFC Install SFC battery If the SF
108. value that was readout is entered through gallons per SFC minute with 1000 multiplier OUTPUT MODE Transmitter in Input pressure DE mode is in equal to or greater non critical than 200 status Displayed Display flashes value may not be 9 o between 200 or valid If display is twice current URV instead of in EU and O L a value Transmitter locks transmitter is in output at 20096 CHECK STATUS critical status and will go no higher regardless of input Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 165 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continuec Operation error codes Table 52 identifies possible meter error codes and what they mean Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes If error indication 15 Then it means You have tried to set local Zero or Span adjustment in a Series 100 transmitter which does not support this option You have tried to set a pressure type engineering unit for a transmitter in SQUARE ROOT mode FLOW or have tried to set a flow type engineering unit for a transmitter in LINEAR mode pressure After this error is displayed the meter will return to the unit EU of the Engineering Unit it was displaying before the set function was invoked You may then select another unit or exit in the normal fashion You have tried to select a process variable for the transmitter using the VAR SEL button The Variable
109. values Honeywell to take effect If you let either the lower or upper display limit time out after 30 seconds the meter discards both newly set values and reverts back to the previously set values If you have not yet set the lower display limit value for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode the meter automatically enters the lower display setting function after it displays previously set value if applicable Go to Table 35 Step 3 If you have already set the lower display limit value this completes the lower and upper display limits setting function for CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode Meter returns to normal operation as shown in example display below If you have just set the upper display limit for Flow unit or CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output mode this completes the limit setting function Meter returns to normal operation as shown in example display below Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 119 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Button Pushing Figure 36 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to Summary select the engineering units Figure 36 Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering Units A v Select Unit EUO 08 g cm EU1 inH O EU2 mmHg EUA mmH O EU3 PSI EUB inHg EU4 KPa EUC mH O EUS 2
110. w st stl bolts 51204983 032 1 Flange adapter kit 172 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 033 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 034 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 041 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 3008 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 042 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 3008 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 035 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 036 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 1502 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 3008 w st stl bolts w vent drain Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 221 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 65 SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories K1 K2 Continued on next page 228 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 80 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 65 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Battery pack assembly 1 See Figure 62 Style A No longer available Order conversion kit 30755131 001 30755080 501
111. you insert it into the adapter may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove while you align the adapter to the process head To deform the gasket submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its recessed mounting groove in the adapter Table 15 Installing Flange Adapter Step Action 1 Insert filter screen if Supplied into inlet cavity of process head 2 Carefully seat Teflon white gasket into adapter groove 3 Thread adapter onto 1 2 inch process pipe and align mounting holes in adapter with holes in end of process head as required Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7 16 20 hex head bolts Example Installing adapter on process head Filter Screen O Q Process Q Head 3T Teflon Gasket Flange Adapter 7 16 x 20 Bolts IM ATTENTION Apply an anti seize compound on the stainless steel bolts prior to threading them into the process head Evenly tighten adapter bolts to a torque of 47 5 to 54 N m 35 to 40 Ib ft 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 41 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter Summary The transmitter 1s designed to operate in a two wire power current loop with loop resistance and power supply voltage within the operating range shown in Figure 16 Figure 16 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters 1440 1200 Operating Area NOTE A minimum of Loop 800 250 Ohms of lo
112. 00 Model Series 900 Model Flange Mount STF1xx STF9xx Liquid Level Differential Pressure STR1xx STR9xx with Remote Diaphragm Seals STG93P STG14T Not Available STF14T 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 1 3 Smart Field Communicator About SFC communications Purpose of SFC The portable battery powered SFC serves as the common communication interface device for Honeywell s family of Smartline Transmitters It communicates with a transmitter through serial digital signals over the 4 to 20 milliampere line used to power the transmitter A request response format is the basis for the communication operation The transmitter s microprocessor receives a communication signal from the SFC identifies the request and sends a response message Figure 4 shows a simplified view of the communication interface provided by an SFC Figure 4 Typical SFC Communication Interface Power RT Supply 4 to 20 mA line Receiver ST 3000 STR3001 The SFC allows you to adjust transmitter values or diagnose potential problems from a remote location such as the control room You can use the SFC to e Configure Define and enter the transmitter s operating parameters including range values output conformity damping time tag number ID and more e Monitor Read the input pressure to the transmitter in engineering units and the transmitter s output in
113. 00 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 4 Installation 4 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter About this section This section provides information about installing the ST 3000 transmitter It includes procedures for mounting piping and wiring the transmitter for operation 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 25 4 2 Summary Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter You can mount all transmitter models except flush mount models and those with integral flanges to a 2 inch 50 millimeter vertical or horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket or a bracket of your own Flush mount models are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank by a 1 weld nipple Those models with integral flanges are supported by the flange connection Figure 8 shows typical bracket mounted and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison Figure 8 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations Angle Mounting Bracket Flat Mounting Bracket Flange Transmitter Connection Flange 24118 Continued on next page 26 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Dimensions Detailed dimension drawing
114. 01111 Prompt asks if you want to set URV SET CLLLISIEHITURIV IT II to applied pressure NON VOL 01 1 11111 ejr URV is set to full tank pressure ENTER 115 1 3 2 2j H 2 O 3 9 F es 13 Call up output for display with full 5 IwloiR K Nie tank pressure applied PUT 1 eT 316111 1 15411111 Read 100 output on display for corresponding full tank pressure For analog transmission check that millilammeter reading is 20 mA 10096 output Continued on next page 138 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank continued Procedure continued Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 14 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to empty and full tank pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed ATTENTION Ranging the transmitter in this way makes it reverse acting
115. 1 Selection is unknown Be sure SFC software is latest version Press SHIFT and 3 to view SFC software version jp p Pi 83101111 Transmitter s write protect jumper is in its read only position If authorized move W R jumper on PWA make configuration change then move back W R jumper on PWA RJ AINjGjE 1210 13 91 Value calculation is greater than display range Press cLR key and start again Be sure special units conversion factor is not greater than display range 206 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 11 7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard Procedure The procedure in Table 68 shows how to run an SFC display and keyboard test Table 68 Running SFC Display and Keyboard Test Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Turn on SFC 2 Pluft Llo ofle 11 Initiate shift key selection di Op SPP ye JA Y T E S T All display segments are working Y Jolka K EjY B O A R D 5 Ready to check operation of jrjojw individual keys 3 E K amp ElS T Confirm key operation by verifying 096 111014 12 01114 1 111 that its row and column location on keyboard are displayed 4 Repeat Step
116. 1 282 4 806 905 4 797 669 4 735 090 4 768 382 4 787 250 4 888 992 5 811 690 5 875 150 5 765 436 4 734 873 6 041 659 and other patents pending 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual lii References Publication Publication Binder Binder Title Number Title Number Smart Field Communicator 34 ST 11 14 Model STS103 Operating Guide ST 3000 Smart Transmitter 34 ST 33 39 Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 Installation Guide ST 3000 Smart Transmitter 34 ST 09 06 Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 Quick Reference Guide For R400 and later PM APM Smartline Transmitter PM12 410 Implementation TDC 2045 Integration Manual gt PM APM Optional Devices Symbol Definitions This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual WARNING risk of electrical shock This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 4 Vpeak or 60 VDC may be accessible ATTENTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD hazards Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices Protective Earth PE terminal Provided for connection of the protecti
117. 100 psig and 338 F 170 C when reduced to 30 psig steam will have a temperature of 306 F 152 C or a loss of only 32 F 18 C This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater This device mixes cold water with the superheated steam to reduce its temperature by removing Btu s per pound of water steam It 1s also possible to use temperature controlled steam traps which actually allow the steam to condense to water and therefore reduce its temperature to a pre set value Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 249 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Superheated steam considerations continued Table B 2 lists the various values of steam pressure saturated steam temperatures at these pressures degrees of superheat added to the saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it 1s reduced to 30 psig steam Table B 2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values to 30 psig Pressure Saturated Superheat Added 3 Final Steam Actual Temperature 1 Temperature Temperature of Steam When 2 2 3 Reduced From 1 1 equals pressure in column one with superheat added 250 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Appendix Configuration Record Sheet SI 3000 Smart Transmitter Configuration Record Sheet Model Number Series 100 900 DP lop RS
118. 101111 Enters change in SFC and calls up ENTER E N T E R E b s F C next DE configuration parameter Yes This action only applies if selection is OTE clol changed Otherwise must press iw 10141 B y t eD CLR key to exit function or A NEXT key to call up next parameter 4 CLR 1 13191111 Prompt asks if change entered in NO LjolA p c H AlNIG E SFC is be downloaded to transmitter If you want to download change go to Step 5 If you do not want to download change press CLR key to exit function This action only applies when Step 3 is valid Otherwise this keystroke exits DE CONF function 5 NON VOL Te To NTFT 13191111 Message exchange is working ENTER 5 es LIN T oye felt 131911111 Parameter change is loaded in transmitter SFC is ready for next function Continued on next page 92 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only continuec Keystroke summary Figure 33 shows keystroke summary for selecting the mode of output signal indication for transmitter DE mode for quick reference Figure 33 Keystroke Summary for selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication dy DE CONF MENU ITEM A DE CONF MENU ITEM NON VOL NON VOL ENTER Yes 22513 7 00 S
119. 103 User s Manual 7 00 7 5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 40outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter a pressure measurement application Refer to Figure 40 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 40 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter Valve D Plug p A Differential Pressure e Transmitter HP side s HP Vent LP side LP Vent Table 40 starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close valve D See Figure 40 for sample piping arrangement 3 Open plug C and valve A to apply head Allow system to stabilize at head pressure H to meter body Then open pressure LP vent Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 131 1 5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter continued
120. 11 Be sure any switches that may trip 8 5 0 8 0 2 2 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NONSE TTT Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER iIS F c wlolRIK INIG and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 D P NOL 21111111 Bien 6 Ti INT 1 tale Initiate shift key selection LLLLLIISPIRRETTLET 1 PLUIT 11 PIT 13191111 Read applied input pressure OUT 515101 0181 111 901 1111 Reading is updated every six PUT seconds INS PJUT 1 Pity 13101111 APEE 7 111 T felt 13191111 Call up output for display OUT PUT 111 T 13191113 Read 0 output on display for 11111 corresponding zero input pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output 8 If SFC and Then milliammeter readings are exactly go to Step 11 zero 4mA are not exactly go to Step 9 zero 4mA Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 129 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 39 starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 SHIFT INPUT OUT PUT 3
121. 111 Transmitter database was incorrect at powerup THATS Request is invalid 0 1 101 11 1 1 1 111 Loop resistance is too low iTlAle 11 11111 No response from transmitter Njo 1 18 JRJEJSJP O N SJE 101 11 1 11 1 111 SFC is not operating properly EE al EST Invalid key entry Table 64 summarizes the message displays for possible invalid key entry errors T Table 64 summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry Errors Message Description None Keystroke makes display blink Invalid keystroke 131011111 The computed SFC value is outside the display range RJAINJGjE 2 1 210 13 918 Interrupt messages Table 65 summarizes messages that may interrupt the SFC display Table 65 summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC Display Message Meaning Remedy 01911 l4 Jelt 31011111 Diagnostics has detected Press STAT key to retrieve IC R I T I IC A L Isltlaltluls critical failure messages Colon The SFC battery is low Recharge the battery ofe tafe 21111111 elit iet Number Symbol Diagnostics has detected a Press STAT key to retrieve Joye slo a non critical failure Or the messages
122. 19 Flange adapter kit 51204983 020 Flange adapter kit 51204983 007 Flange adapter kit 51204983 008 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT st stl 1508 w st stl bolts NPT st stl 1508 w st stl bolts w vent drain 17 st stl 1502 w SS NACE bolts NPT st stl 1502 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 72 NPT Hastelloy 1508 w st stl bolts NPT Hastelloy 1502 w st stl bolts w vent drain 1 NPT st stl 1508 w st stl bolts 1 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 1 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts 1 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 1 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts 1 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain Continued on next page me mm mm m Ooo 226 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 51204983 013 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 014 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 023 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 3008 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 024 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 3002 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 015 Flange adapter kit 17 NPT Hastelloy 3002 w st stl bolts
123. 2 300 5 2 280 536 260 500 230 446 200 392 180 356 165 329 160 320 120 248 100 212 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 255 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters Associated Apparatus Parameters The Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows Vmax Maximum safe voltage that can be applied to the apparatus terminals Imax Maximum safe current that can be applied to the apparatus terminals The Associated Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This voltage is the maximum from a single channel Maximum output current that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This current is the maximum from a single channel Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This voltage is the maximum across any combination of terminals of a multiple channel configuration Maximum output current that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This current is the maximum through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel configuration Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus that can be considered present at the terminals Unprotected inductance in the apparatus that can be considered present at the terminals Maximum capacitance that can be connected to th
124. 240 Vac charger is as follows Lead Color Function Blue Neutral Brown Hot Green Yellow Ground ATTENTION it takes up to 16 hours to fully recharge the battery pack and you can use the SFC continuously for up to 24 hours before the battery pack needs recharging The ambient operating temperature limits for the SFC are 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F with relative humidity in the range of 10 to 90 RH For transmitters operating in the Analog Mode be sure to put an analog control loop into its manual mode before initiating SFC communications with the transmitter Also be sure any switches that may trip alarms or interlocks associated with the analog loop are secured or turned OFF Communication superimposes digital signals on the loop wiring that could affect the analog control signal Be sure the power supply voltage does not exceed 45 The ST 3000 transmitter and SFC were designed to operate with voltages below 45Vdc Be sure there 1s at least 250 ohms of resistance between the SFC and the power supply for proper communications 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 23 3 5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option Reference Table 8 lists pertinent Smart Meter specifications for reference specifications Table 8 Local Smart Meter Specifications Operating Conditions Parameter Rated Extreme Transportation and Stor
125. 3 001 Series 100 900 housing seal kit 55 amp 56 1 1 2 2 4 51205897 501 Series 100 900 terminal assembly without lightning 56 3 K2 1 1 1 2 protection 51404078 502 Series 100 900 terminal assembly with lightning protection Process head gasket kit 1 1 4 4 10 For STD924 A B E F and J STD930 A B E F and 58 60 K3 J STG944 STG974 models 30757505 001 Teflon and Viton For all other Series 100 DP and STD924 C D G H 57 K6 and L STD930 C D and L and STD974 models 30753788 003 Teflon 30753788 004 Viton For STA122 STA140 STA922 STA940 STG140 and 59 K3 STG170 30754154 002 Teflon and Viton 30754154 003 For STG180 59 K3 Meter Body 1 1 2 2 4 Specify complete Series 100 900 DP Models 57 1 model number from Series 900 DP Models 57 58 1 nameplate plus R300 Series 100 900 GP AP Models 59 1 Series 900 GP Dual Head Model 60 1 Series 100 900 LGP and Series 900 AP Models 61 1 Series 900 Flush Mount Models 62 1 Series 100 900 Flange Mount Models 63 1 Series 100 High Temperature Models 64 1 230 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 13 Reference Drawings 131 Wiring Diagrams External Wiring Wiring diagram drawing numbers are listed here for ST 3000 Release Diagrams 300 Series 100 and 900 Transmitters These wiring diagrams are included in numerical order behind this page for wiring reference Release 300 307
126. 3 as required to check all keys or go to Step 5 to exit test 5 om amp v Bro AjRID ENTER Yes 111019 8 4 MAIN Check ENTER key location Ready for operation 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 207 208 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 12 Parts List 12 1 Replacement Parts Part identification e All individually salable parts are indicated in each figure by key number callout For example 1 2 3 and so on e All parts that are supplied in kits are indicated 1n each Figure by key number callout with the letter K prefix For example K1 K2 K3 and so on e Parts denoted with a are recommended spares See Table 81 for summary list of recommended spare parts Figure 53 shows major parts for given model with parts list Figure references Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 209 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference ST 3000 Release 300 Electronic Housing Assembly See Figures 55 and 56 f Meter Bodies 2 1 ERI 2 Z LI 2 2202 2 2 ue et Hee TE E a E 0 HI DP See Single Head See Dual Head See LGP See Models Figure
127. 5 YILUANSNVYL 000615 TT OT 6 006 001 531435 YALLIWSNVal 000615 IV 0200 WO O0EVWS 2 1162 9 T 55 719 4 31351559 122 SfILICeI V ZVH 9 3 9 SALON QI3183ANU2 43DRIVED 752 1 1 ame 20559 T 3JAUsIddV ALILIN3 IN3WdINOS 71041 09 AlddNS d3A0d NOILVOO Sfili el ZVH NLIN S v 046 92 9 FNIS 0 PT T 006 001 S3IN3S 000615 TT DNIAVeKI JWJS LUN LXI LLL OT WS 00E YWA 3LUN 2 58v T NUISIAIG I 559719 NOILVOO Q3I31SSV 122 SfILIGel V ZVH ONIAIM ALVNASL Iv 210 7 2 9 S31UND Q3183ANU 8 318898 SNLVAVdd 19120559 ALLLIN3 JaW4 NLILLVOLI 1 DATS Trer0d 18 31143043 3lUND IN3WdInO 3 1051 09 SIL ev ZVH NLIN 43 dk 640 LHS 00 90 0131v0 1 31925 EX VV U yY vt E e 006 001 531435 YILUANSNVaL 000515 ONIAVeGI 31935 LON OT 41 141 Iv q33J jA 00 Vel ALUN 53430249
128. 51 l ne 11 CLR key to exit function NEXT key to call up next parameter or W PREV key to call up previous parameter 9 CLR Dje Plt bloli Prompt asks if change entered in NO 8 SFC is to be downloaded to transmitter If you want to download change go to Step 6 If you do not want to download change press CLR key to exit function This action only applies when Step 4 is valid Otherwise this keystroke exits DE CONF function Continued on next page 94 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 10 Selecting Message Format DE Mode Only continuea Procedure continued Table 29 selecting Message Format continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 6 NON VOL Dje Te To NTFT 13101111 Message exchange is working ENTER SF LC IwJoJRIKI INIGI 1 Yes LIINI 1 Jove felt s ep1 4 Parameter change is loaded in IL 111 1 transmitter SFC is ready for next function Keystroke summary Figure 34 shows keystroke summary for selecting the message format for transmitter in DE mode for quick reference Figure 34 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format DE CONF MENU SHIFT ITEM NEXT 2 DE CONF MENU ITEM Mis NON VOL NON VOL ENTER Yes 22514 7 00 S
129. 53607 Series 100 900 51204241 Transmitters 51204242 Transmitter Dimension drawings for individual transmitter models are available and Dimension Drawings listed in the ST 3000 Release 300 installation guide document supplied with your transmitter If you need a copy of a drawing please determine the appropriate drawing number and contact your Honeywell representative to obtain a copy 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 231 232 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 ONIAVaq 319535 0986 08 gt LON 33308 SAS 3495 non 9n M3LLIWSNVMI 531435 000E1S mw WVaDVIG ONIAIM 19 1 3 8 2 9 Deseo mm juan ve V HSINI4 3a SV3W AVANT LE DACT L09ESL 31140923 SI LI HOIHA 814 0 3SOdaNd ANY 3D ASN SALON AONVISISSY JONVISISSY SIVNOA JONVLSISSY 4001 1 LON LSAW ONY 32N3GIJNDJ NI 5 SI JHL 50 ALaad0ad JHL SI SNIAVe I 1 9 JHL WANVAW NOILONYLSNI 335 AlddNS 83MOd UNY INIOd NOILOANNOO XOLV INAWWOO 1313 LYVNS N33ML38 SNHO 082 40 15548 541845 WAWININ v 38 3e3HlL 4191553997 38V SNOLLO3NNOO HOIHM LV HILLINSNVSL 000615 NV 6 5843 JHL
130. 8 mm 6 5 8 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 209 mm 8 1 4 in 4 inch 300 Ibs serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 mm 7 8 in diameter on 200 mm 7 7 8 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 254 mm 10 in Pseudo Flush 2 inch 150 105 serrated face flange with 4 holes 15 9 mm 5 8 in diameter on 120 6 mm 4 3 4 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152 4 mm 6 in 3 inch 150 105 serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 152 mm 6 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm 7 1 2 in Flush Mount 1 pipe mount 316L SS standard option General piping e When measuring fluids containing suspended solids install guidelines permanent valves at regular intervals to blow down piping Blow down all lines on new installations with compressed air or steam and flush them with process fluids where possible before connecting these lines to the transmitter s meter body e Be sure all the valves in the blow down lines are closed tight after the initial blow down procedure and each maintenance procedure after that Continued on next page 40 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued Installing flange Table 15 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process adapter head Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before
131. 8UNF 2B 30755124 001 Stainless steel Series 100 9 16 18UNF 2B 30755124 002 Carbon steel 1 2 in NPT 30755124 005 Stainless steel 1 2 in NPT 30755124 006 Monel 1 2 in NPT 30755124 008 Hastelloy C 1 2 in NPT 30755124 007 Continued on next page 220 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 60 series 900 Dual Head GP Meter Bodies Table 75 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads GP models 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 K1 30757506 001 Head bolts carbon steel 3 8 inch Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 001 Head bolts stainless steel NACE 3 8 inch Kit includes Bolts Nuts K2 30757501 001 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Head with side vents Head dummy CS Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent Plug Gasket 30757501 002 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Head without side vents Head dummy CS Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent Plug Gasket 30757502 001 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head dummy SS Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757502 002 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head dummy SS Head gask
132. 94 2 Aaa 31 25 00 0 0 092 evevoerg Ey Muon vl 442 NOILdO 21414 194941 1 ALON LN3NdIRnO3 CL 3 9 SALON CASLASANODO 3I va S L Valvddv I31VIJUSSV 3IJILS832 952 dJLLUN 5 1 006 001 531435 YALLINSNVAL 000515 0 55913 9473 TI 55912 q 2 8 I 55913 ANOASNIALNI 311 40245 44 5 ATIVOISNIALNI 01 39 IL n NOILVOO 1 5 NHELEVOH T 19 ert OI 6 E N Z 9 G 43 everdels I Qvod ONIMVAT 31925 LON 6 0 amp 41140993 630 6 00 90 01 3190 2 A33 ANON 31925 E 00 20 20 0173Y 006 ISCUW 44144 1 1101 1 0 dslsw 411346 000645 ALVNG aL V 3LUND 7 8 9 SILON AUS ENDO SL VelVddVv 14191905579 e ES IM Pe d 952 1 14 5 WO O0EVWS aes 006 001 S3IN3S SQ3LINSNVeHI 000515 ONIAIM JALVNasl IV 3100 LN3AdIGQ93 4 9 9 SJIUN 33133AND2 23 3I32V8 gt SNLVAVddY 31VIOISSV 31311332 57 3100 CIT WO OOEVWA M 3 Ud 4LON gt HISSV Ig 109 3 3 II SSV 19 q 2 8 v dnoad I 55919 S3HHWSNVHLI 000016 ANOASNIALNI nde A TIV ISNINLNI NOILYOU I 5 NHILVOD SNUCAYZYH NUN S TT
133. 98L 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 110 40 to 230 Absolute Pressure 5 122 40 to 93 40 to 200 See Specification Sheet STA140 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 80 40 to 176 STA922 40 to 85 40 to 185 See Specification Sheet STA940 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 80 40 to 176 Flange Mounted STF128 STF132 STF12F STF13F 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STF14F 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 85 40 to 185 STF14T 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 150 T 40 to 302 T STF924 STF932 STF92F STF93F 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 Remote Diaphragm Seals STR12D STR13D STR14G STR17G STR14A See Specification Sheet See Specification Sheet STR93D STR94G 40 to 85 40 to 185 See Specification Sheet T Process temperatures above 125 C 257 F require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as follows Process Temperature Ambient Temperature Limit 150 C 302 F 50 C 122 F 140 C 284 F 60 C 140 F 125 C 257 F 85 C 185 F TT Process temperatures above 65 C 149 F require a 1 1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature NOTE For transmitters with local meter option see Table 8 20 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 3 3 Pressure ratings Table 6 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter continued given transmitter Upper Range Limit URL Table 6 lists maximum working pressure and overpressure ratings for a The maximum working pressure 1s the pressure
134. A B C amp D Dust Ignitionproof for Class Division 1 Groups E amp Suitable for Class Division 1 Conduit seals required within 18 of enclosure Group A only Intrinsically Safe for use in Class Division 1 Groups A B C amp D Class Division 1 Groups E F amp Class Division 1 T4 at 40 C T3A at 93 C maximum ambient when connected in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241 Nonincendive for use in Class Division 2 Groups A B C amp D Suitable for Classes amp 111 Division 2 Groups F amp T4 at 93 C maximum ambient hazardous locations 42 Vdc max Environmental Indoor amp outdoor hazardous locations NEMA 4X Intrinsic Safety Class I II III Divisions 1 and Entity Parameters 2 Groups A Vmax lt 42 4 V dx 225 2 dx 225 2 225 mA LS 1 2W no integral indicator or with integral Smart Meter option SM Li 150 uH With Analog Meter option ME 1 Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 257 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Table D 2 CSA Entity Parameters Canadian Standards Association CSA e Explosion Proof for Class Division 1 Groups B amp D Dust Ignition Proof for Class ll Division 1 Groups F amp Class Ill Division 1 Conduit seals not requ
135. Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 2820 West Kelton Lane Phoenix Arizona 85023 BUSINESS REPLY MAIL PERMIT NO 4332 PHOENIX ARIZONA POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control 2820 West Kelton Lane Phoenix Arizona 85023 Attention Manager Quality NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE USA Sjuouiuio i Cut Along Line i Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Honeywell Inc 16404 N Black Canyon Phoenix Arizona 85023
136. C battery pack was removed for shipping and or storage you pack will have to install the battery pack and charge the batteries before you can operate the SFC The procedure in Table 7 outlines the steps for the battery pack Table 7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack Step Action 1 Turn SFC face down on working surface Use metric hex wrench 2 5 mm to remove screws in battery compartment cover and remove cover Insert battery pack in compartment and connect plug in compartment to pin on battery back Example Battery pack installation Battery Pack Hex Screws Replace cover and tighten hex screws Connect lead from battery charger to recessed connector on left side of SFC Maa The SFC battery charger is not intrinsically safe Always recharge the SFC battery pack in a nonhazardous location The SFC itself is an intrinsically safe device Continued on next page 22 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 3 4 Considerations for SFC Continued Install SFC battery pack continued Temperature Limits Usage guidelines Table7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack continued Step Action 5 Plug battery charger into any standard 120 Vac outlet or universal European 240 Vac outlet as applicable for charger power rating If 240 Vac charger is supplied with stripped leads instead of universal European plug lead identification for
137. CUCHION 59 MEG III m 60 9 2 Enteng a lag NUMDEHR 71 OA E ODIT 73 0 5 JAd uslirig Damping te otia mex idu ae ner desees aa pony Dean Fast dre du Ups ee 76 6 6 Selecting Unit of Measurement e 78 6 7 Setting 95 80 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments 84 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only 91 6 10 Selecting Message Format DE Mode 94 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using Mater 96 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using 103 T3 DiScobrecling SFO iM ELLEN MC DR eek IM EDI 122 SECTION STAR TUP tasa divss a vss sU 123 011 TI EE 123 7 2 STAN RR 124 7 3 Running Analog Output Check to haan enews 125 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP 128
138. Continued Given the criteria above the following examples are made A Class III Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or material processing combustible flyings are handled manufactured or used A Class III Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled Flammable gases vapors and ignitable dusts fibers and flyings are classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most easily ignitable mixture within air Group classifications are as follows Class I Description of Atmosphere Group Atmospheres containing acetylene Atmospheres containing hydrogen fuel and combustible process gases containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by volume or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard C Atmospheres such as ethyl ether ethylene or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as acetone ammonia benzene butane cyclopropane ethanol gasoline hexane methanol methane natural gas naphtha propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Class II Description Group Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including aluminum magnesium and their commercial alloys and other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics F Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts including carbon black charcoal coal or other dusts that have been sensitized by other materials so that they present an explosion ha
139. F CSA approval body certification for Explosionproof Class Division 1 Groups B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups E F Non Incendive Class l Division 2 Groups A B C D Intrinsically Safe Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups C D F CSA approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe Class Il IIl Division 1 Groups C D E F LCIE approval body certification for Flame Proof CENELEC EEx d T6 Intrinsically Safe CENELEC EEx ia T5 LCIE approval body certification for Flame Proof CENELEC EEx d IIC T6 Zone 2 Europe certification for oself Declared per 94 4 ATEX4 Ex 13 GD T6 X Ui x 42V x Zone 2 40 lt Ta lt 93 IP66 67 body certification for Intrinsically Safe CENELEC EEx ia IIC 5 SA approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe Ex ia IIC T4 Non Incendive Ex n IIC T6 T4 with Local Smart Meter option ML approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe OEx ia T6 X No certification 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 235 236 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Appendix B Freeze Protection of Transmitters B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Problem When water 1s present the process fluid and ambient temperatures can fall below the freezing point 32 F 0 C pressure transmitters and their piping requi
140. F G LRM RIT T PIT 13191111 Prompt asks if you want to set LRV SET TT TT 71 11181517111 T applied pressure 11 13 91111 LRV is set to applied head pressure ENTER 11215 3 2 H 2 O 3 9 F H4 times density of liquid in 52 reference leg 7 oe 111 T felt spen FT Call up output for display OUT PUT ay T Terr 13191111 Read 0 output on display for 11 Tef Jelele TTT TL T corresponding empty tank pressure plus head pressure H4 For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 0 output Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 137 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank continued Procedure continued Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 8 If you Then can not fill tank go to Step 9 can fill tank to go to Step 10 desired full scale level 9 Key in URV that is equal to full tank Go to Step 14 pressure See section 6 7 in this manual for details on keying in a range value 10 Close plugs C and D 11 Open valves A and B Fill tank to desired full scale level 12 F 111 T T 13191111 Read present URV setting 100 15191 01010 H 2 0 3 9 F G 131
141. FC STR3012 Continued on next page 50 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 9 2 Starting Establishing Communications continued communications Once you connect the SFC to the transmitter or loop wiring you are ready to start communicating with the transmitter The procedure in Table 17 outlines the steps for communications with an ST 3000 transmitter without an assigned tag number Table 17 starting Communications with Transmitter Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Slide power switch on left side of SFC to SFC runs its self check and displays ON position initial prompt 2 Pluft Llo oP 11 IMIAINI If this prompt appears transmitter is 11111111 11111111 in Analog mode of operation This is the factory default mode of operation setting Put your control loop in the OR manual mode of operation before initiating SFC communications Note that you must do this separately through the receiving device in the loop If this prompt appears transmitter is PEIEUILEEIBILEE i Digital DE mode of operation ASSAS 3 aS Tlale 14101 11111111 Be sure any switches that may trip T R Pls s E c u R E bp alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned OR off Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 This prompt does not appear for transmitters operating in DE mode See DE transmitter display response in Step 5 4
142. Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush Mount 4 51196557 002 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP Flush mount STR14G STR17G and STR94G 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 211 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 55 series 100 900 Electronics Housing Electronics Meter End 6 Figure 56 series 100 900 Electronics Housing Terminal Block End Continued on next page 212 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 70 Parts Identification for Callouts Figures 55 and 56 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 30756961 501 30756961 502 Cap for Series 900 only Cap for Series 100 only 1 2 30756996 501 Cap meter for Series 900 only 1 30756996 502 Cap meter for Series 100 only 3 51205897 501T Terminal assembly without lightning protection 1 01404078 5021 Terminal assembly with lightning protection 4 51309389 501 Local Zero and Span Adjust Only 1 51309389 502 Local Smart Meter Only 51309389 503 Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust 5 51309397 501 Electronics Module Assembly 1 6 51204038 001 Retaining Clip 1 7 30756997 501 Analog meter 1 K1 30757503 001T Electronics housing seals kit includes O rings K2 51197425 001 Terminal assembly without lightning prote
143. GP Models Figure GP Models Fiaure Models Figure STD110 57 STG140 99 STG944 60 STG14L 61 STD120 57 STG170 59 STG974 60 STG17L 61 STD125 57 STG180 59 STG18L 61 STD130 57 STG90L 61 510170 57 Single Head See STG94L 61 STD904 57 58 AP Models Figure STG97L 61 STD924 57 58 STA122 59 STG98L 61 STD930 57 58 STA140 59 STD974 57 58 STA922 59 STA940 59 pos gv 2 e 457 D Remote Diaphragm Seal rp LGP Models Flush Mount See Flange STR13D STR14G GP Models Figure lig i STR44A STR17G STG93P 62 28 STR93D STR94G STF132 63 Attention No replacement meter body is STF12F 63 available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models STF13F 63 STF14F 63 STF924 63 STF932 63 STF92F 63 STF93F 63 High Temperature See Models Figure ES E STG14T 64 MN STF14T 64 Continued on next page 210 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 54 ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference 1 Angle 2 Mounting Bracket Flat Mounting Bracket Table 69 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference Key Part Number Description No Quantity Per Unit 1 30752770 003 Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount 2 30752770 004 Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for models Flush mount STR14G STR17G and STR94G 3 51196557 001
144. Guide Mounting Bracket Optional ST 3000 Quick Shipped User sManual Reference separately Guide if ordered src Operating Pocket Guide Card Battery Leads ES Battery Charger optional Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 11 1 4 Transmitter SFC Order continuea About documentation Various documents are available for reference describing how to install configure and operate the ST 3000 transmitter e ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide Using SFC Model 575103 34 ST 33 39 One copy is shipped with every transmitter This document provides information for checking installing and wiring the ST 3000 transmitter for operation e ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and SFC Smart Field Communicator Model STS 103 User s Manual 34 ST 25 14 One or more copies are sent to the address designated on the order when specified This document provides detailed information for installing wiring configuring starting up operating maintaining and servicing the ST 3000 transmitter This 1s the main reference manual for the ST 3000 transmitter and it overlaps some data in the previously listed Installation Guide 34 ST 33 39 and in the following Operating Guide 34 ST 11 14 to minimize cross reference e ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 34 ST 09 06 Shipped with User s Manual This document provides abbreviated versions of procedu
145. Honeywell ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300 and Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 User s Manual 34 ST 25 14B 7100 Tetal Plant Copyright Notices and Trademarks Copyright 1998 by Honeywell Inc Revision 03 July 7 2000 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping amp methodologies and formatting principles TotalPlant TDC 3000 SFC Smartline and ST 3000 are U S registered trademarks of Honeywell Inc Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Honeywell Industrial Automation and Control Automation College 2820 West Kelton Lane Phoenix AZ 85023 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 About This Publication This manual is intended as a detailed how to reference for installing piping wiring configuring starting up operating maintaining calibrating and servicing Honeywell s family of Release 300 Series 100 and Series 900 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters It is based on usin
146. IG T 1924 30 9 LHS 00 90 013194 3 4 31925 0 1 ET 006 001 531435 ONIAVaG 31935 LON DG Es TOMADUOH YHILUANSNVEL 000515 ot TT OT 6 DNISIA 4LVNasl 19 jA 00 VWel Gl 9 x33 NUILVOLU SfLD svZvH DAT S Evev0e2IS 3114099 2 LNAWdINOS G v SILON GI L3 3ANDO 73 3ISSIVI JUS L NUS Sn1vavddv 131VIOUSSV 131311339 23 13N32 31UN5 Alddns 83A DUd NOILVOU SNUCaVZVAH NUON 43 BE 924 240 LHS 00 90 013191 2 Aza 31905 20016 EX vt EL ol ONIMVAC 31925 LON OI NUILdO 44140 DAT Z Evev0elS 31140 9 Uv ee SEIN LNAWdINSS G SALON 1 1 48 gt JB ENDO SnliValvddv I31VIOUSSV 3I JIL3 32 313N323 CT 31UN A IddNS 006 001 531035 AALLINSNVYL 000515 Gl 9 xdd NOILVOO 50 0 6 NOILVOO SRblIsVvZVH NLIN dI Appendix A Table Ill Options in Model Number 1 Table Options Reference Codes and The following table lists available Table III options alphabetically and descriptions numerically by their codes and gives a brief description of the options Note that restrictions do apply based on other as built transmitter characteristics and some options are mutually exclusive T entered an
147. IJUSSV 3L dLEe VSO 006 001 S3IN3S Sj3LLIINSNVeSHI 000515 11106 II 55970 B4 3 ne II 55919 IMG v evev0e JIIJ0V2 00 40 40 092 ALON IN4aWdINOS OaLNoOo ALON a A Ld q 2 8 V dnDN9 71 55 12 NDIILVOLU 1 SNUCAaVZVH NUN SNOASNIALNI dllISf103S 34dVS AT IVOISNISLLNI 2 132 TT OT N Z A N qvod SNIAVaGI 31935 LON S evevO2c t 34114093 6 JU S 5 00 90 01 3190 2 Aza 31 25 VITIS IG eX DUI 00 40 40 49 2 WO O0EVWA ISCUW ASLAW 911011 aslaW 41046 000 WS ct 31 1 IV ALON LN3AdIQO3 2 3 9 SALON CI3L83ANDO9Z8HTelelva SNLVAVddY 31VIJUSSV 3I 3118329 9 lt 2 6 ALON l W 00 VWel 006 001 S3IN3S YHALLINSNVAL 000515 SLVYNASl Iv J Wy e ALON LNAWdINOA Z 9 SALON CAFLAAANOI 42142942 snlvavddv 319121559 31311339 52 JALOND S WI 00EVWS ALON III 55912 49473 dier ILOSSM 79 006 001 S3IM3S 28V 55 12 Jn93SNISLNI SLIANDAS IAAVS ATIVIUISNIALNI S3LIHWSNVNI 000615 Es NUIIVOHT 125 159798 SRHGSVZVH NUN S TT OT 6 8 2 9 2 t 9 LHS 00 90 07 3194 2 4
148. ION it milliammeter reading doesn t change be sure you are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local adjustments The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set engineering units after you release the ZERO button Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 87 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments continued Procedure continued Table 27 setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 7 Using an accurate pressure source apply pressure equivalent to desired upper range value to transmitter ATTENTION differential pressure transmitters apply pressure to the high pressure head and be sure that the pressure to the low pressure head is at its reference value Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA If reading Then is not exactly 20 mA go to Step 9 is correct go to Step 10 ATTENTION you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustment option you may substitute the Local Smart Meter readings for the milliammeter readings For example with URV input pressure applied assume that the meter reads 396 inH2O instead of 400 inH2O In this case the meter reading is less than 100 or 20 mA Example Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches of water Honeywell Continued on next page 88
149. LSNI NIJHA 052859 CAIC I 55913 NI Sdaldadvd LAOHLIM NOILVTIVLISNI 414 41491115 701 AMINO CaIelelV8 AlddAS 1 G I3IHS SNUILVJIIddV ASHLO e G3CIN3WWUO38 ANY ALIWSOSNO9 42 404 038411934 SI JAIM 3IHS 6 WHO 5531 38 LSAW HLVd GQNNOAD 3HL JU 39NVISIS33 8 4N3WdIn83 ONITIVLISNI 38 LSAW ONIMVAT NDUILV I IVISNI 5 4434113 SALVAVdd Y G3IVIOUSSV Z C3LJIL8329 US NUILVOU T3IJISSV 19 SNOGSVZVH 2 I 55912 NI GATIWLSNI AVW ShlVevddV C31VIJUSSV 1842 952 38 LSNW SNLVAVddY GSALVIDOSSY 9 WAOdddY 952 G3llIWS3d SI UN S T lavd 3013 12313 NVIGYNVD JHL HIIA 32 904 22 38 LSANW NOILVTIVLSNI v A0S2 3aDW 3LlVs N35 3SN LUN LSAW SNLVAVdd 31919055 01 4133 LNaWdINDA 1 41 DNILII3 19 318VO 131511 TLAN V ONISN 543814 CNV 1500 LSNIVOV S3ISIN3 41493 1935 135 LON SI LINGNOD WLW 01914 383H SNUILVTIVISNI 55913 II 55913 4 72 11 402 222 PSI lt 20A XONA NDILLVOTVA3 ALLLN3 3Hl 303 SNOILONALSNI SSSNLOVANNVYW HIIA 3JONVGISUOOV NI CATIVLSNI LSNW 543144 4 1350 38 5843144 11432 ALILN3 A0 1 VSO SALON 0 11 WS O0EVWSs 0 1 Na 00 Vis H 0ST 11 AW ASLAW 9B0 IVNV HNOST 11 34 00 VNW3l 0 11 WS
150. Manual 7 00 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Approval body If your transmitter was ordered with Table III option 3N for self declared requirements approval per 94 9 EC ATEXA you must use a power supply that includes a voltage limiting device that will keep the voltage to the transmitter from exceeding 42 Vdc You can achieve this by using a battery as the supply or one of these voltage limiting means e Double wound mains transformer per BS 3535 or equivalent e An adequately rated zener diode whose voltage is not significantly higher than the rated voltage e An adequately rated semiconductor voltage regulator Lightning protection When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection you must connect a wire from the transmitter to ground as shown in Figure 18 to make the protection effective We recommend that you use a size 8 AWG American Wire Gage or 8 3717 bare or green covered wire Figure 18 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection Electronics Housing Connect to Earth Ground Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 45 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Conduit seal WARNING Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I Division 1 Group A Hazardous Classified Location accordance with ANSI NFPA 70 the US National Electrical Code NEC require a LISTED explosionproof seal to be
151. Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration continued Table 32 smart Meter Engineering Units Code Smart Meter Code Engineering Unit Transmitter Output Conformity EUO Linear or Square Root EU1 inHoO EU2 mmHg EU3 PSI EUA kPa EU5 MPa EUG mbar Linear EU bar T EU8 gicm2 EU9 EUA mmH2O EUB inHg EUC mH2O EUD GPM Square Root EUE GPH 5 Square Root EUF Custom 1 Linear or Square Root These selections have indicators on smart meter display T Use stick on labels provided for other engineering units Selecting Engineering The procedure in Table 33 outlines the steps for selecting the desired Units engineering units for a Local Smart Meter using its local adjustments on the face of the meter You will be selecting the unit of measurement that you want the smart meter to indicate during normal operation WARNING When the transmitter s end cap is removed the housing 1s not explosionproof Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 105 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Selecting Engineering Units continued Table 33 selecting Engineering Units Loosen lock on meter end cap and unscrew cap from housing Be sure transmitter power is ON Press UNITS SET button Typical di
152. Model STS103 User s Manual 243 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Electric heating continued Steam heating Figure B 7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control be valve 6 heating Union or coupling cable Shut off valve Process pressure transmitter 6 Insulated enclosure Temperature controller thermostat Temperature sensor Steam heating is perhaps the most common yet potentially the most damaging method of protecting transmitters from freeze ups Since steam is generated for use in the overall process operation it 15 considered an available by product The most important point to remember when steam heating transmitter meter bodies 1s the temperature of the steam that will be used and its pressure We recommend that you review the next paragraph Superheated steam considerations to get a better understanding of the temperature problem with steam heating In brief do not assume that 30 psig steam is 274 F 134 C and cannot damage a transmitter rated for 250 F 121 C With steam heating as with electrical you should use insulated transmitter body housing impulse piping and valves Continued on next page 244 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Steam heating continued It is common practice to use conventional st
153. N T Key in T and space as first 111 111111 71 111111 characters in tag number T A G INO 21111111 1111 SCR PAD foje T A G Nof 21111111 111 4 LINI tale TINTO T Take SFC keyboard out of alpha mode and put it into numeric mode Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 71 6 3 Entering a Tag Number continued Procedure continued Table 21 Entering Tag Number Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 SW 1 TIENT T oye Tr TATeT Info T Key in 53011 as numbers in Tag LLLLLLLLIPELISILLII number PIN foje NOI LE LLL IPIT hioj V D P TJAJG Njo 1 11111111 IPIT 13161 1 1 V PUNY foje NOI 1 11111111 1310 1 4 6 NON VOL T T Message exchange is working ENTER Iw o R k Loads tag number into transmitter s Yes working memory foje Tjafse NOI 111111 hion Keystroke summary Figure 26 shows keystroke summary for entering tag number for quick reference Figure 26 Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag Number DE READ NON VOL ENTER analog mode only Yes NON VOL ENTER Yes 22506 72 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 4 Selecting Output Form Background You can s
154. No Tlale INIo TL T T T T TL T T Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER is F c and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 ELUENT 6 21111111 PITI 30111 4 B 15111 01 1 111611 11 Call up first configuration parameter 9 Isiti Call up next configuration NEXT Mjeitje r jCloin fii g parameter 6 sit lt Call up next configuration NEXT SJEJNJSJOJR 21 parameter 7 AC 11 5111 101 1 116111 Call up next configuration NEXT 1 21717 5111210 9 parameter 8 15111 01 1 111611 11 Call up save restore function NEXT 5 JRJEJSJTJOJRJEI 9 5 8 1 Promptasks if you want to save ENTER JDjA T A database from this transmitter es 10 SS 51 1 Prompt asks for confirmation of ENTER FAIRIE 7100 jSjU RIE database save function es Continued on next page 160 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database continued Procedure continued Table 49 saving and Restoring a Database continued Step Press Key Read Disp
155. PM and GPH e The percent and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity configuration 2 Additionally the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter s 0 to 100 output e If you select pressure type engineering units you cannot set the lower or upper display limits These values are automatically set when you select the engineering units You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter 15 configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity The lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 for a transmitter in square root mode and cannot be changed You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you have selected custom engineering units EUF and the transmitter output conformity 1s set to LINEAR When setting the lower and upper display limits 1f you let either the lower or upper display limit setting time out after thirty seconds the meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous settings The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting either lower or upper depending upon which limit you set first 3 If you change the transmitter s output conformity you must reconfigure the Local Smart meter as outlined 1n Tables 33 to 36 Continued on next page 104 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart
156. Pumps Motorized Valves Valve Cavitation e Process Characteristics Temperature Maximum Pressure Rating Figure 7 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before installing a transmitter Figure 7 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation b Lightning Relative Humidity Ambient Temperature MD Fan Motors Transceivers 224 RFI Pump Meter Body vibration Temperature 21003 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 19 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter continued Temperature limits Table 5 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of transmitters with silicone fill fluids See transmitter specifications for temperature limits of ST 3000 transmitters with alternative fill fluids Table 5 Operating Temperature Limits Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluids L oc F F _ Differential Pressure STD125 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 85 40 to 185 STD120 STD130 STD170 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STD904 STD924 STD930 STD974 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 Gauge Pressure STG140 STG170 STG180 STG14L STG17L STG18L 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STG14T 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 150 T 40 to 302 T STG93P 15 to 65 5 to 149 15 to 9511 5 to 203 TT STG944 STG974 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 STG9OL STG94AL STG97L STG
157. S All calibration CORRECTS were deleted and data was reset to default characterization values Recalibrate transmitter 310 118 6 8 SPAN correction factor is outside acceptable limits Could be that transmitter was in output mode Check input pressure and be sure it matches calibrated range value Check meter body Do a URV CORRECT procedure Pit 31011118 818 2 CIOfRRRI ZERO correction factor is outside acceptable limits Could be that either INPUT was zero or transmitter was in output mode during a CORRECT procedure Check input pressure and be sure it matches calibrated range value Check meter body Do a LRV CORRECT procedure 015 31011118 I AN Transmitter is operating as a current source Press OUTPUT and CLR keys to tell transmitter to exit output mode Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 197 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC Display continued Procedure continued Table 60 Clearing the Symbol from the SFC Display continued If Message 15 Then Possible Cause 15 And Suggested Corrective Action 15 PjT 81011118 _ lej 5 015
158. SS NACE nuts kit Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg flange adapter 4 K4 Nut hex metric M12 process heads 4 K8 Bolt hex head metric M12 90mm lg process heads 4 30753785 001 St steel vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753787 001 Monel vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753786 001 Hastelloy C vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753788 0031 Process head gasket kit PTFE material 30753788 0041 Process head gasket kit for Viton material K6 Head gasket For gasket only 30756445 501 PTFE quantity 12 or 6 30749274 501 6 Viton head O rings and 6 Vition flange adapter O rings K7 O ring 3 K9 Gasket flange adapter for gasket only 30679622 501 6 Teflon or 6 30749274 002 6 Viton Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 215 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit Optional Flange Adapter Kits two heads Not Shown 30754419 002 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with carbon steel b
159. Select button is non functioning on the ST 3000 R300 transmitter You have tried to set Lower or Upper display limit for pressure type engineering units EU1 to EUC or Lower display limit for flow type engineering units EUD EUE or CUSTOM unit EUF in transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output Or you have tried to set upper display limit for flow or Custom unit in transmitter with SQUARE ROOT output and URV set to zero 0 In SQUARE ROOT mode the transmitter s URV cannot equal zero The Lower and Upper display limits only apply for CUSTOM EUF unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output The Upper display limit also applies for FLOW EUD EUE and CUSTOM EUF units with transmitter in SQUARE ROOT mode but the Lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 and cannot be changed Continued on next page 166 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continuec Operation error codes continued Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes continued If error indication 15 Then it means You have tried to set a span value that is outside acceptable limits for your transmitter You have tried to invoke a Local Smart Meter set function with the transmitter s Write Protect jumper in its Read Only position You cannot make changes in the Local Smart Meter settings when the transmitter s configuration is write protected Meter transmitter e Cycling tr
160. T 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 93 6 10 Selecting Message Format DE Mode Only Background You can select one of these broadcast formats for the digital signal transmission as described in Table 20 4 Byte type 6 Byte type Procedure The procedure in Table 29 outlines the steps for selecting a 6 Byte type format for example purposes only Table 29 selecting Message Format Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 LIN T eit 131911111 Initiate shift key selection Call DE CONFIG Output ON DER SOG selection ITEM DIET 13101111 Sjijnjg je JRjnjg 2 A DJE TeTo NTF PTT 13101111 Calls up next DE CONFIG menu NEXT w folle 16141 T item Message format selection appears 3 DE CONF DJE TeTo NTF JPIT 13101111 Calls up next message format m 11917 foley 160181 181 151 0 1 T selection Repeatedly press MENU ITEM ITEM key to cycle between two format selections See Table 19 for details Stop when w DB 6 Byte selection is on display 4 p DJE TeTo NTF PTT 13191111 Enters change in SFC and calls up ENTER Is F C next DE configuration parameter ed This action only applies if selection is MIE TeTeTNTFT IPIT 13191111 Otherwise must press 171
161. T 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 95 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC Background Configuring the Smart Meter Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower limit settings for the Local Smart Meter s digital readout through the SFC e If you initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed on the Local Smart Meter the Local Smart Meter will respond to the command it receives last In other words the last command wins e Local Smart Meter does not have to be installed for you to configure it through the SFC The meter s configuration data 1s stored in memory on the transmitter s PWA rather than in the meter itself Normally when using a differential type transmitter you can select the transmitter s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications This linear or square root output parameter selection 18 called output conformity output form See Subsection 6 4 for more details When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement there are certain rules to keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection These rules are described in the following paragraphs The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select fo
162. age Ambient Temperature F 40 to 176 58 to 194 C 40 to 80 50 to 90 Relative Humidity JoRH 10 to 90 0 to 100 Accuracy No error Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution Display Resolution Bargraph 3 of reading Shown as Digital Readout 0 005 for 19 99 reading range 19 99 0 05 for 199 9 reading range 199 9 40 5 for 1999 reading range 1999 5 for 19990 reading range 19 99 K 50 for 199900 reading range 199 9 K 500 for 51999000 reading range 1999 K 5000 for 19990000 reading range 19990 K Display Update Rate Above 32 F 0 C gt second or below 32 F 0 C 1 seconds Meter Display at High The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are and Low Temperature true in that no damage to the meter will occur over these temperatures Extremes however the readability of the LCD 15 affected if taken to these temperature extremes e The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 C 176 and 194 F rendering the display unreadable This effect 1s only temporary and normally occurs at 90 C 194 F At low temperatures the update rate of the display is lengthened to 1 5 seconds due to the slower response time of the display At 20 C 4 F the display becomes unreadable due to slow response of the LCD This 16 also only temporary and normal readability will return when temperature returns above 20 C 4 F 24 ST 30
163. alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 145 7 10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 44 starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 4 TT T 1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER is F c Iw o R k iin e 1 and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 LIN T A G N 111111 ITI hion 5 T elt 13191111 Initiate shift key selection PT ISTH PETE TT INPUT 111 PIT 3 211 11 Read applied input pressure which J 10 Should be zero PUT PUNT PUTT P T 13101111 6 T Pl 13161111 Call up output for display OUT PUT ay T 13191131 Read 0 output on display for 11 Tel Jelele 4 TT T corresponding input pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 0 output 7 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to zero and full scale pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correc
164. am or electric heating of the drain point will prevent pipe rupture due to freezing Figure B 3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow Mechanical diaphragm seals Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive vet broadest application of all the methods Similar in principle to the liquid seals diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid carry over into the process fluid This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance checks to assure full and equal liquid seal legs Welded diaphragm seals with special fills permit temperatures from 34 to 600 F 36 to 315 C at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated to assure viscosity of tars and similar high freezing point fluids under the coldest conditions Continued on next page 240 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Mechanical diaphragm seals continued You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate expansion and contraction of the fill fluid under varying temperatures without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area In general conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pressure ranges above approximately 75 psig with special large diameter elements required for low pressure or differential pressure measurements You can lag insulate impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process
165. ansmitter power OFF ON will have no affect on meter Interaction configuration The meter digital readout will be in the previously set engineering units and applicable upper and lower display limits will be intact when transmitter power is restored See ATTENTION in section 6 8 when setting range values and configuring the meter display If you switch the transmitter mode from Analog to DE the ANALOG indicator on the meter will go out If you switch from DE to Analog mode the ANALOG indicator will light e If you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from SQUARE ROOT to LINEAR the meter s digital readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent and the FLOW indicator will go out when the change is downloaded to the transmitter Likewise 1f you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from LINEAR to SQUARE ROOT the meter s digital readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent and the FLOW indicator will light when the change 18 downloaded to the transmitter In either case you must reconfigure the transmitter as outlined in Section 6 11 or 6 12 of this manual 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 167 168 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 9 Maintenance 9 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Preventive Maintenance
166. assembly kit carbon steel head model STD110 only 30753908 013 Process head assembly kit st steel head model STD110 only 30753908 014 Process head assembly kit carbon steel DIN head model STD110 only 30753908 015 Process head assembly kit st steel DIN head model STD110 only K1 Pipe plug 2 K2 Vent plug 1 K3 Vent bushing 1 K5 Process head 1 K6 Gasket PTFE process head 1 K11 Gasket PTFE optional flange adapter 1 Continued on next page 216 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit Process Head Kits one head with Viton head gasket 30753908 101 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C head 30753908 102 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C DIN head 30753908 103 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head with side vent drain 30753908 104 Process head assembly kit st steel head with side vent drain 30753908 105 Process head assembly kit Monel head 30753908 109 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head without side vent drain 30753908 110 Process head assembly kit stainless steel head without side vent drain 30753908 111 Process head assembly kit stainless steel DIN head without side vent drai
167. ast types for data transmission to the digital control system Note that DB in following selection prompt stands for database w oDB 4 Byte Byte 1 is output signal mode Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value 1 2 3 4 FLAG PV PV w DB 6 Byte Byte 1 is output signal mode Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value Byte 5 is data type identifier URV span etc Byte 6 is data being sent 1 2 3 4 5 6 FLAG PV PV PV ID DB ATTENTION approximate rates of transmission in repeats per second are Data 4 Byte 6 Byte PV value rpts sec 2 5 rpts sec Temperature 1 rpt 2 5 sec 1 rpt 3 sec Continued on next page 64 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 2 Overview Continued What to configure continued Table 20 summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters continued Configuration Data Setting or Selection Failsafe Mode NOTE This parameter is valid only to select the failsafe action for the STDC card in a controller not the transmitter If you are using the STDC card to interface with the ST 3000 transmitter contact Honeywell Technical Assistance in using this parameter ATTENTION An STIMV IOP module has built in failsafe capabilities and ignores this parameter The following parameters are only for transmitters with optional Local Smart Meter Meter Engineering Units If the transmitter is set for LINEAR output conformity you
168. at the sealing liquid 1s at its required specific gravity Purging Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous materials from clogging the impulse lines to pressure level or flow transmitters The bubbler system using a constant air flow regulator 18 particularly common on open tank liquid level applications No heating of impulse lines or transmitter 1s required but normal precautions are required to keep water out of the air supply system Gas applications We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse lines to transmitters measuring gas flow or pressure Although these components could be heated similar to water and steam applications the simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self draining This means that the impulse lines are connected to the lowest Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 239 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Gas applications continued point in the transmitter meter body and the piping 18 sloped downward at least one inch per foot Side connected transmitters with vent drains at a lower point in the meter body must be regularly checked to assure condensate removal If the transmitter 1s located below the process taps not recommended piping must still run downward from the transmitter to the drain point and then up to the process as shown in Figure B 3 Ste
169. ated with NEMA enclosure type numbers Basically the IEC designation consists of the letters IP followed by two numerals The first characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid foreign objects entering the enclosure The second characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to the harmful ingress of water Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 263 D 3 Enclosure Ratings continued IEC Designations Table D 6 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure continued type numbers to IEC enclosure classification designations The NEMA types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC classifications for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert from IEC classifications to NEMA types Table D 6 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification NEMA Enclosure IEC Enclosure Type Number Classification Designation 1 IP 10 2 IP 11 3 IP 54 3R IP 14 3S IP 54 4 and 4X IP 56 5 6 and 6 12 and 12K 13 NOTE This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529 264 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 A Analog and DE Modes 55 Analog meter connections 47 Analog Mode 2 B Barrier Diaphragms Cleaning and Inspecting 171 Battery Pack Installin
170. ater at 60 F 15 6 C 11118 1 111111 6 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 79 6 7 Background ATTENTION Procedure 1 Setting Range Values Using SFC You can set the LRV and URV by either keying in the desired values through the SFC keyboard or applying the corresponding LRV and URV pressures directly to the transmitter e We factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of water ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39 2 F 4 C Fora reverse range enter the upper range value as LRV and the lower range value as the URV For example to make a 0 to 50 psi range a reverse range enter 50 as the LRV and 0 as the URV e The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and maintain the present span URV LRV e Ifyou must change both the LRV and URV always change the LRV first Table 25 gives the procedure for the range values for a sample 5 to 45 inH5O at 39 2 F 4 C range Table 25 Keying in LRV and URV Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 E 18111111 T ep s e 1 4 Present LRV setting Pressure for 4 09 jajajaja 1 2101 1319 mAdc 0 output 2 5 vi ft 1 13141111 Key in desired setting It is not 1151 1111 1 12101 1 3191 necessary to key in a decima
171. ations LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter The meter runs a brief self test whenever power 1s applied to the transmitter All the display indicators are lit during the self test as shown in Figure 21 Figure 21 Display With AII Indicators Lit Honeywell wv v wv v 0 100 z FLOW OUTPUT MODE ANALOG CHECK STATUS In O GPH mmHg KNOWN VALUE GPM PSI A Please refer to Table 31 in this manual for a description of the pushbuttons on the meter face See Section 8 6 for a description of the indicators with examples of typical display indications and error codes Note that the display may revert to dashes after the self test until the transmitter initializes all its functions Use the SFC to check the transmitter s status 56 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 5 4 Changing Mode of Operation Procedure If you need to change your transmitter s mode of operation use the steps in Table 19 to change the mode from analog to digital or digital to analog If you have an optional Local Smart Meter you can readily tell your transmitter s present mode of operation by checking whether the ANALOG indicator on the meter display 1s lit or not Table 19 Changing Mode of Operation Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 LIIIN T Jove 15171 lololol Initiates shift key selection Note that 51 11 111 1111
172. be reversed for a model STR 13D transmitter or a model STR 12D transmitter without a compound characterized meter body Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 147 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals continued Procedure continued Table 45 starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with 5 Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings iTlAle 101 11 1 1 11111 Be sure any switches that may trip iT R P s s E c u R E D alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 TT T T Confirm that TRIPS are secured establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 EIN foje ITJA G NOI 111111 hion 4 See Figure 48 for sample piping If you Then arrangement can not empty go to Step 5 tank can empty tank go to Step 6 5 Key in LRV that is equal to empty tank You can use this
173. cal span correction is less than 0 2 regardless of the range down to the point where specification turndown begins The typical performance of a 400 1nH5O transmitter after a calibration reset or a Corrects Reset as it 1s often called can be expressed as 0 1 n Accuracy 0 2 Span inH20 100 By correcting the zero input the typical performance will be 0 2 or better For other transmitter ranges the initial zero offset will be scaled by the ratio of the Upper Range Limit URL to 400 at 39 2 F 4 C Thus for a 100 psi range the initial zero offset can be expressed by 2768inH 221 400inH 20 Note that these are typical values and they may vary However our patented characterization method includes several techniques which help to ensure that this level of performance can be achieved Continued on next page 192 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 10 5 Resetting Calibration continued Procedure The procedure in Table 59 shows how to reset calibration data in a transmitter with an SFC Table 59 Resetting Calibration Data With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and turn it on 2 2 Be sure any switches that trip 8 15 1 9 812121 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secur
174. can choose to have the Local Smart Meter display pressure readings in one of these engineering units 2 PSI MPa BAR Kg cm 2 inHg 32F mmHg OC KPa mBAR g cm 2 mmH20 4C mH20O 4C Custom If the transmitter is set for SQUARE ROOT output conformity you can choose to have the Local Smart Meter display flow readings in one of these engineering units GPM GPH Custom Engineering Units High and Low You can enter desired lower and upper high display limits to scale flow GPM GPH or Custom engineering units to represent the transmitter s O to 100 output within the meter s display range of 19 990 000 ATTENTION when the transmitter is set to SQUARE ROOT output conformity the lower display limit for flow units GPM GPH and Custom unit must equal zero 0 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 65 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration The flowchart in Figure 25 summarizes the typical entries selections decision summary decisions associated with configuring an ST 3000 pressure transmitter Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration Assign a unique tag number consisting of up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify this transmitter YES Establieh commuhicatiensdand See procedure in Table 21 for entry details enter assigned Tag Number at Press ID key and acknowledge TRIPS SECURED prompt if SFC
175. configuration prompt TAG required to call up SFC prompt TAG NO Use NUM ALPHA NO key to toggle between Alpha mode and Numeric mode to enter alphabetic characters and numbers respectively through SFC keys Determine if transmitter s output is to represent a straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurements See procedure in Table 22 for selection details Call up SFC configuration prompt CONFORMITY and select menu item LINEAR Or SQUARE ROOT Select LINEAR or SQUARE ROOT through SFC configuration prompt CONFORMITY Continued on next page 66 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration decision summary continued Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration continued Determine appropriate damping time value for your process We suggest that you set the damping to the largest value that is reasonable for your process See procedure in Table 23 for selection details Press DAMP key and use NEXT PREV key to select stored damping time value through SFC prompt DAMP 1 Select desired damping time value in seconds through the SFC prompt DAMP See Unit of Measurement in Table 24 for list of available pre programmed engineering units in the SFC See procedure in Table 24 for selection details Call up a pressure value on the SFC display and repeatedly press UNITS key t
176. configured LRV ATTENTION Zero 0 is only valid entry for GPM or GPH unit or CUSTOM unit with transmitter in SQUARE ROOT output mode Continued on next page 100 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 11 INCISO E U Enters lower display limit in SFC and ENTER p iN SjF C prompt asks if you want to enter YES changes in transmitter If you want to E njg tts H i IL o enter changes go to Step 12 If you E N T EJR 61 812 do not want to enter changes press CLR key to exit function 12 ONE 0 11115131 H i L Jo Downloads changes to transmitter ENTER 5 WIOIRIKITINIG and returns to Configure Meter YES prompt Press CLR key to return to E nig Hij L ST CONFIG menu Skip Step 13 1 la jo ajd e d T ujr el rl 13 Mle t eir E n g Downloads selected pressure ENTER 5 WIOIRIKITINIG engineering unit to transmitter Press YES CLR key to return to ST CONFIG Ein g Ulni tis menu Dlajt la ool t jo ajd ejd EE EEE
177. croll backward scroll forward through values 0 through values 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 112 ST 3000 Release 300 SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 13 f you have already set the upper display limit value this completes the lower and upper display limits setting function for Custom engineering units in the transmitter Meter returns to normal operation setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display continued Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in third digit and activate next active digit Readout now displays next active digit which will be BLANK unless lower value was set to 1 before Press Increase A button to set digit to 1 or Decrease button to set it to BLANK Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in 1 digit and activate sign segment Readout now displays sign segment which will be BLANK for positive values unless lower value was set for negative values before Press Increase A button to set sign segment to minus sign for negative values or Decrease button to set it to BLANK for positive values Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in current settings as lower display value limit ATTENTION For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR output you must set both lower and upper display limits for values to take effect If you let either the lower or upper display
178. ction conversion kit includes Screws cover and terminal block 51197425 002 Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit includes screws cover and terminal block Not 30757504 001 Electronics housing hardware kit GP I LGP I includes screws Shown gasket plate washers cover terminal and spacers Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 213 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 57 series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp STD930 C D G H K and L and STD974 Continued on next page 214 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 2 30757104 001 Adapter meter body to electronics housing 1 30753790 001 Carbon steel bolts and nuts kit Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg flange adapter 4 K4 Nut hex metric M12 process heads 4 K8 Bolt hex head metric M12 90mm lg process heads 4 30753791 002 A286 SS NACE bolts and 302 304
179. d pressure press psu CLR To abort setting of LRV to applied pressure press ST 3000 Release 300 SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 3 Entering a Tag Number ATTENTION There is a Configuration Record Sheet provided in Appendix C if you want to record the configuration data for your transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 21 shows how to enter a sample tag number of PT 3011 into the transmitter s configuration database Table 21 Entering Tag Number Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 DE READ Tlale 18101 11111111 Be sure any switches that may trip 1 5 Is E c u R E B alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off This prompt only appears for transmitters in analog mode 2 NON VOL Tlale 1 101 111111111 4 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER is F c 0 iinic and establish transmitter Yes communications 113 ATTENTION this procedure also applies for transmitters DE mode The prompt may show DE XMTR instead of output form and transmitter type in top row if you have not established communications as previously described in Section 5 2 of this manual 2 NUM E TITNT T ove TrTATe INTO T Put SFC keyboard into alpha mode Activates alphabetic characters in upper right hand corner of keys 3 1 111 T Ilale I
180. d stored in memory CF Calibration Fixture with 74 NPT Port for pressure source for STG93P only CR A286 stainless steel and 302 304 stainless steel NACE nuts for process heads and 316 stainless steel NACE bolts for mounting flange adapter to process head 316 stainless steel modified DIN process heads Flat mounting bracket carbon steel Calibration test report and certificate of conformance F3399 Certificate of conformance F3391 Certificate of Origin F0195 NACE certificate 0198 otainless steel reference head carbon steel is standard Low temperature 50 C ambient limit Angle mounting bracket carbon steel Analog meter 0 to 100 linear O to 10 square root Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 233 1 Table Ill Options Reference continued Codes and descriptions continued If Code is Then transmitter option 15 lt 316155 Mounting Sleeve requires customer installation to process for STG93P only O X Clean transmitter for Oxygen or Chlorine service with certificate B Angle mounting bracket stainless steel H 316 stainless steel electronics housing with M20 conduit connections 09 M Local Smart Meter V oide vent drain in process head end vent drain is standard 51 or 52 1 2 inch stainless steel adapter flange for process head otainless steel customer wired on tag blan
181. damping value listed in Table 20 3 Repeat Step 2 until display shows Transmitter s damping time is now set to two seconds PAM TT Ter 11121 10 SJEJCJOINIDIS You do not need to press the ENTER key to store the damping time in the transmitter s memory Continued on next page 76 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 5 Adjusting Damping Time continued Keystroke summary Figure 29 shows keystroke summary for adjusting damping time for quick reference Figure 29 Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Time C DAMP H A 22509 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 6 Selecting Unit of Measurement Background You can choose to have the pressure measurements displayed in one of the preprogrammed engineering units in the SFC Procedure Table 24 lists the pre programmed units and shows how to select them ATTENTION The engineering units shown in Table 23 are only available in an SFC with software version 3 2 or greater The selections are similar in other software versions but without temperature references and minus the inches of water at 68 F 20 C engineering units Table 24 Pre Programmed Engineering Units for Selection D THEN sequentially press key until IF you want LRV etc displayed in display shows inches of water at 39 2 F 4
182. e 2 D claration f Conformity 262 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification 264 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual Acronyms flee Absolute Pressure KPM tcI Advanced Process Manager AW Gee HR n American Wire Gauge DE Digital Enhanced Communications Mode 19 Differential Pressure EM Rc Electromagnetic Interference Obi E aM ANIME Gauge Pressure D r mer ere name n High Pressure lj E M High Pressure Side DP Transmitter S Inches of Water EG 25111141 12105605 EM In Line Gauge Pressure Low Pressure E Low Pressure Side DP Transmitter Lower Range Value 11 003 EM LM e Milliamperes M Millimeters of Mercury RR National Pipe Thread 6l
183. e apparatus Maximum inductance that can be connected to the apparatus CSA does not recognize these parameters at this time Continued on next page 256 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Entity Concept Under entity requirements the concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criteria for interconnection 15 that the voltage Vmax and current Imax which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe considering faults must be equal to or greater than the voltage Voc or Vt and current Isc or It levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus considering faults and applicable factors In addition the maximum unprotected capacitance and inductance Li of the intrinsically safe apparatus including interconnecting wiring must be less than or equal to the capacitance Ca and inductance La which can be safely connected to the associated apparatus If these criteria are met then the combination may be connected and remain intrinsically safe Both FMRC and CSA define the entity parameters in Tables D 1 and D 2 Table D 1 Factory Mutual FM Entity Parameters Code 00000000 1C Factory Mutual FM Approval e Explosionproof for Class Division 1 Groups
184. ead present URV setting 10096 115191 161001 210 1 1319 G 11 PITI 1 4 Prompt asks if you want to set URV 5 to applied pressure NON VOL PUTRI 1 1 eir 13101111 URV is set to full tank pressure ENTER i 175 73 6 2 210 1319 F es 11 NU olu TIR J1 T 13 61111 Call up output for display with full UE Is Fle Nie tank pressure applied PUT jojujT P 1 PIT 3101111 Read 10096 output on display for 11 1919 99111111 corresponding full tank pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA 10096 output 12 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to empty and full tank pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 13 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 150 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 8 Operation 8 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page 8 1 Introduction 8 2 Accessing Operation Data 8 3 Changing Default Failsafe Directio
185. eadings correlate Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close block off valve See Figure 43 44 for sample piping arrangement 3 Remove plug from Tee connector to Allow system to stabilize at static vent it to atmosphere if applicable pressure 4 DE READ Talc 1 101 111111111 Be sure any switches that may trip TIR 5 1918 91217 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NON VOL T T T T 7 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER IS FIC W olRIKI IINIG and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 No 111111 Ie 31 6 191 111 elt s e 1 4 Initiate shift key selection COT N PJUT 1 PIT 13101111 5 2 input pressure which should be zero PUT PUNT PUTT PIT 13101111
186. eads stainless steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent Plugs Gaskets 30757148 002 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent Plugs Gaskets K3 30757505 0011 Process Head Gasket Kit Kit includes 6 Teflon head gaskets 30757100 001 6 Viton head gaskets 30749274 004 and 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets 30679622 501 30757149 001 Replacement heads Hastelloy Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757500 001 Replacement heads Monel 4 Kit includes Head with side vents Head gasket Teflon Head gasket Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets Optional Flange Adapter Not Shown K4 30679622 501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 30749274 502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton Continued on next page 218 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 59 series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body K1 Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 2 See Table 74 Process head GP AP models 1 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without head GP AP Models 1 model number
187. eam traps on all steam heating systems They permit live superheated steam to enter the heating coils and piping down to the trap You should also use conventional steam traps with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the transmitter under warm day conditions If the heating pipes are not carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate in the piping they could freeze at low temperatures All steam traps require a periodic maintenance program Dirt scale and water softeners will cause traps to stick or jam which result in their either blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam allowing condensate freeze up in cold weather When steam traps are used for cold weather freeze protection of water lines a thermostat controlled steam supply valve which will shut off the steam at ambient temperatures higher than 509 10 C will save steam and prevent overheating A more general solution is offered by a specialized type of trap which throttles condensate flow based on its temperature This backs up hot water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure assuring temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure Models are available to set the condensate temperature from about 70 to 200 F 21 to 93 C They must be located within 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm of the transmitter body and like all steam traps they also require periodic maintenance The engineering of
188. eck of housing and screw new meter body into housing until bottom of header portion of center section is approximately flush with neck of electronics housing 11 Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in header Loosen set screw half turn rotate housing to desired position and tighten set screw 12 Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 in Table 52 as applicable to return PWA and bracket to transmitter housing We recommend that you lubricate end cap O ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning 33 or equivalent before you replace end cap ATTENTION Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper viewing through end cap window You can rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments 13 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power 14 Verify transmitter s configuration data Restore saved database if applicable 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 181 182 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 10 Calibration 10 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page 10 1 Introduction 10 2 Overview 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal 10 4 Calibrating Range with SFC 10 5 Resetting Calibration About this section This section provides information about calibrating the transmitter s analog output and measurement range It also covers the procedure for
189. ed or turned off 3 E T T T d Confirm that TRIPS are secured S F C K IIN G and establish communications with ENTER Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 PPL MAS INO 1 4 t Ti INT 131091111 Initiate shift key selection A E ERES Prompt asks if you want to correct K 111111 PIT 3108 dip t clor R Elei si calibration data by resetting it to RECI default values If you do want to reset data go to next Step If you don t press CLR key to exit function 5 NON VOL 11111111 31011118 Previous calibration CORRECTS ENTER 5 WOR KT INISI E are removed and calibration is reset Yes to default characterization values as 11111111 indicated by non critical status c o R R E e Tr s R E s E T symbol on right hand side of display Symbol remains on display T Tale Ts until transmitter is recalibrated LS ATTENTION The accuracy of the reset transmitter will be approximately 0 2 at reference conditions See the Background paragraph in this section for more details 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 193 194 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Sect
190. elect the transmitter s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications using a differential pressure type transmitter Thus we refer to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity or the output form Procedure The procedure in Table 22 shows how to select the desired output conformity If the transmitter 1s equipped with a local smart meter you must reconfigure the smart meter as described in Section 6 11 or 6 12 of this manual whenever you change the transmitter s output conformity ATTENTION Table 22 selecting Output Conformity Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 B 11 1 Isi TeTem ET Te T T T Prompt asks if you want to access 1 T T configuration parameter called conformity if you want to access it go to Step 2 If you do not want to access it press CLR key to exit function or NEXT key to call up next configuration parameter 2 NON VOL eTeINTFIGoTRIMH TTIYT T T T TL T Present output conformity is linear CCCP Nera es 11111 Present output conformity is square jsjeju AlR E R O oT DE CONF j 3 output conformity to square 115 19 Room root cloiNIFlolRIMIT Y Change output conformity to linear LLL J 1111
191. er s programmable read only memory PROM fault jP T 301111 EJR B O D Flalul iTi Electronics PWA and meter body are incompatible 1 30111 Possible meter body or electronics based problem Communication errors Table Table 63 summarizes the message displays associated with communication errors A communication error has these effects on SFC operation e All the SFC functions are disabled e Communication error messages are cycled in the display at two second intervals Press ip and then ENTER to view messages again 63 summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors Message Description mj JAJRJOJUJNJD Communications is unsuccessful THATS CJO MMM SFC failed a communication diagnostic test THATS RJEJS LJOJ Loop resistance is too large or supply voltage is too low mj LL JEJE JRJEJSJPJOINISIE Illegal response from transmitter Continued on next page 200 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 11 4 Diagnostic Messages continued Communication errors continued Table 63 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors continued Message Description 1 101 111111
192. er the analog or DE mode of operation Be aware that configuration data for the transmitter as well as for the Local Smart Meter is stored in a non volatile memory on the transmitter s PWA and make up the transmitter s configuration database Therefore the transmitter and meter configuration are lost if the PWA is replaced Performing a save and restore function using the SFC will preserve the transmitter s configuration database See Section 8 5 for the steps to perform save and restore functions using the SFC ATTENTION since the SFC 16 compatible with other Honeywell Smartline transmitters be sure all configuration data applies to a pressure transmitter Table 20 summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters Configuration Data Setting or Selection Transmitter Tag Number Up to eight characters Damping Time Constant Any one of these value selections in seconds 0 00 0 5 4 0 32 0 0 2 1 0 8 0 0 3 2 0 16 0 Type of Output Conformity LIN Linear SQRT Square Root Unit of Measurement ATTENTION Note that ST 3000 transmitters with inches of water ranges are factory calibrated using pressure referenced to a temperature of 39 2 F 4 C Pressure readings can be displayed in any one of these pre programmed engineering units 2 PSI MPa bar KG cm 2 mmH2O 4C mmHg OC KPa G cm 2 inHg 32F 20 4C 2 68F 2 60F LRV Lower Range Value
193. ess variable 1s available for monitoring and control purposes and the meter body temperature 1s also available as a secondary variable for monitoring purposes only See Figure 3 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 3 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Figure 3 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation Factory Characterization Data Electronics Housing Meter DP or PP Sensor Temperature Sensor Digital signal broadcasts PV in floating point format over Static Pressure Sensor 20 mA loop n amena cea a Mri cla etm dime e 40 Modular Electronics Terminal Block Pressure Series and model Honeywell s line of ST 3000 Smart Transmitters includes these two number data series designations e Series 100 e Series 900 Each series includes several models to meet various process pressure measurement and interface requirements Each transmitter comes with a nameplate located on the top of the electronics housing that lists its given model number The model number format consists of a Key Number with several Table selections as shown below SS c2 5 v AN O lt a x NE O 29 4 lt Key Number Table Il Table Ill Table IV s ripi1 21o ElL1 H 10101010101
194. ets Teflon head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30756941 005 Stainless steel blind reference head HR option K3 30757505 0011 Process head gasket kit Kit includes 6 Teflon head gaskets 30757100 001 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets 30679622 001 6 Viton head gaskets 30749274 004 Optional Flange Adapter Not Shown K4 30679622 501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 6 30749274 502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 6 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 221 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 61 series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body at Round Body Hexagonal Body Table 76 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 61 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body LGP model 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body LGP model 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Continued on next page 222 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 62 series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body Table 77 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 62 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body Flush Mount model 1 model number fro
195. g a model STS103 Smart Field Communicator SFC as the operator interface for the ST 3000 transmitter Be aware that data in this manual overlaps information in the ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide and the Smart Field Communicator Model 5 5103 Operating Guide to minimize cross reference While this manual provides detailed procedures to assist first time users 1t also includes keystroke summaries for most procedures as a quick reference for experienced users If you will be digitally integrating the ST 3000 transmitter with our TotalPlant Solution TPS system you will need to supplement this information with data in the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration Manual which 1s supplied with the TDC 3000 bookset TPS is the evolution of TDC 3000 This manual does not apply for non Release 300 Series 100 Series 600 Series 100e and non Release 300 Series 900 transmitter models If you have a non Release 300 Series 100 or Series 600 ST 3000 Smart Transmitter refer to the nstallation Guide 34 ST 33 28 and User s Manual 34 ST 25 09 supplied with the transmitter for information If you have a non Release 300 Series 900 or Series 100e Smart Transmitter refer to the nstallation Guide 34 ST 33 31 and User s Manual 34 ST 25 11 supplied with the transmitter for information Patent Notice This product 1s covered by one or more of the following U S Patents 4 520 488 4 567 466 4 494 183 4 502 335 4 592 002 4 553 104 4 54
196. g and Charging 22 Bracket Mounting Transmitter 27 C Calibration Calibrating Analog Output Signal 55 Calibrating Range with SFC 189 Equipment Required 784 Resetting 92 Typical Equipment Connections 9 Communications Starting 5 Configuration Database 60 Configuration Decisions Summary 66 Configuration Parameters 63 D Damping 63 Damping Time Adjusting 76 Keystroke Summary 77 DE Mode 3 DE protocol format 2 Diagnostic Messages 196 Communication Errors 200 Critical Failures 200 Interpreting 203 Interrupt Messages 20 Invalid Key Entry 201 Non Critical Failures 199 Diaphragm Seals 240 Display and Keyboard Test Running 207 Dropout Square Root 75 Index Electric Heating 242 EMC Directive 8 Enclosure ratings 264 Engineering Units Selecting 78 Engineering Units High and Low 65 Environmental Conditions 19 F Failsafe Direction Changing 55 Flange Adapter Installing 4 Flange Connections Description 40 Flange Mounted Transmitter Mounting 32 34 Flow Measurement DP Starting Up 128 Flush Mounted Transmitter Mounting 33 Freeze Protection 237 H Hazardous locations reference IEC Classifications 259 North American Classifications 253 Hold Memory SFC 61 Lightning Protection 45 Linear Output Selecting 73 Liquid Level Measurement DP with Remote Seals Starting Up 147 Liquid Level Measurement DP Starting Up Pressurized Tank 36 Starting Up Ven
197. g with Steam Heating Steam Supply low pressure 1 4 OD steam tracer line Pipe insulated with waterproof outer cover 756 Shut off valve Steam heat Impulse piping with tracer line 1 4 thick insulation gt lt 1 Pipe strap about every 15 hut off valve Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping Shut off valve Union or coupling Process pressure transmitter Steam trap or i condensate temperature lt q Insulated enclosure valvle lt q Condensate return from steam trap All steam and condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1 per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate All condensate lines must be protected from freezing Superheated steam considerations We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212 F 100 C only at the normal atmospheric pressure of about 14 7 pounds per square inch absolute psia If the pressure of steam 15 increased above 14 7 psia the temperature of the steam 1s also increased For example if we have steam at 30 pounds per square inch gage psig the steam temperature 1s 274 F 134 C Continued on next page 248 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Superheated steam considerations continued On industrial flow and pressure measurement applications we may be required to use steam to heat the impulse piping to the flow or p
198. he following paragraphs Note that there also a few messages that we have grouped as general interrupt messages at the end of this section Non critical failures Table 61 summarizes the non critical SFC status message displays All SFC functions remain operational during a non critical failure and the sign appears on the right hand side of the display Table 61 summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non Critical Failures Message Description 015 IPT 83101118 CJOJR RJEJC T S 5 Must recalibrate transmitter to attain required accuracy 310 118 818 8 SPAN correction factor is outside the acceptable limits for accurate operation s T A T u s 31011118 818 z ElRIO Zero calibration value is too large Excess zero correction may be an indication of a problem with the process or installation jS T A r u s 31011118 LUN Transmitter is operating as current source 018 1 ol 81011118 Input pressure is more that 2 times greater than the Upper Range Limit of the transmitter jP T 31011118 DjA C CJO MIP No temperature compensation data exists for D A c
199. iated Note that Custom unit is 5 21 2 shown for example purposes only JH i L o is F c iw o RIKIIINI cf ATTENTION If you select GPM or Jeu Hli 1 GPH unit with the transmitter in its 8 cle M d d 141211 LINEAR mode the prompts INVALID REQUEST Download Error and MtrNotInFlowMode sequentially displayed after the SFC WORKING prompt and display returns to the Configure Meter prompt Transmitter must be in its SQUARE ROOT Flow mode for GPM or GPH to be a valid unit selection Press W PREV key if you want to view present high and low display limits loaded in the transmitter 8 S Hil m Key in 525 as upper display limit for 151 11111111111111 Custom unit QW ATTENTION the display range 2 of the meter is 19 990 000 If you S enter larger values they will not be 181251 LETT Tritt displayed 9 NONNOL Jelu Enters upper display limit in SFC ENTER 81 and calls up lower display limit ES TET 89 i RlANGE Tt l ll 10 C ujs t o m Key in 5 as lower display limit for gt 541551 M 4 Le Custom unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode S Note that lower limit value is 215111 1 1 referenced to
200. indications at these output percentages calibration input source for If outputis Then meter imm MS reads 096 4 0mA 1 0V 25 8 0mA 2V 50 12 0mA 3V 6096 13 6mA 3 4V 80 16 8mA 4 2V 10096 20 0mA 5 0V 9 1 3 0 1 1 Exit constant current source mode vp Check that character disappears OUT PUT from right side of display since jojujT P 1 3 011 1 8 transmitter is no longer in output _ 1499 O JJ mode CLR opus TPL 1 IPIT 31011119 NO SIF IC WJOJRIK TINIG 1310 111 JRJEJAJO YI E EET rn Continued on next page 126 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 3 Running Analog Output Check continued Procedure continued Figure 38 Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant Current Source Mode Voltmeter Precision Field Milliammeter Terminals Red N SFC Differential Pressure Type Transmitter 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 127 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 39 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter a flow measurement application Refer to Figure 39 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 39 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter
201. ine pressure If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 11 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 132 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank Procedure The procedure in Table 41 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter a liquid level measurement application for a vented tank with a dry reference leg Refer to Figure 41 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 41 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank Valve A d To HP connection on meter body Tap location at the minimum level to be measured S s LP Vent Differential Pressure Transmitter For the procedure in Table 41 we are assuming that the tank 1s empty and the piping arrangement includes a block off valve Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 133 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank continued Procedure continued
202. ing Range Values Using SFC continued Table 26 gives the procedure for setting range values to sample applied pressures Table 26 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Apply known input pressure to transmitter that represents LRV for 096 4 mAdc output 2 E LTR Vv 11111 13141111 Present LRV setting Pressure for 4 s je ejejo M o s e t mAdc 0 output 3 G 1 111111 felt 13191111 Prompt asks if you want to set LRV to applied pressure If you dont want to set LRV press CLR key to exit function Otherwise go to Step 4 4 NON VOL CTRIVT RET T felt 13191111 Message exchange is working ENTER Sjrjic WJOJRIKITINIG es 1 181 11111 eir 3 9 1 1 Applied LRV setting stored in z 18131717 H 2 O0 3 9 F transmitter s working memory 5 Apply known input pressure to transmitter that represents URV for 10096 20 mAdc output 6 F 111 T T 13191111 Present URV setting Pressure for ME 714111813171 8219 13 9 20 mAdc 100 output 7 91 1 1111 1 felt 13191111 Prompt asks if you want to set URV SET u R v to applied pressure If you don t want to set URV press CLR key to exit function Otherwise go to Step 8 8 NON VOL F UTRIVT RET T Jett 13191113 Message e
203. ing under opposite extremes Continued on next page 242 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Electric heating continued Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal transmitter body bolts and containing electrical heating elements and thermostats certain precautions are required with such arrangements some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available thermostats Also thermostat settings should not approach the body temperature limit because the heat gradient across the meter body can be such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when the thermostat setting 18 lower Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for Class I Group D Division I and II installations The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered For this reason we recommend using alarm devices with manual acknowledgment and reset see Figures B 6 and B 7 for typical piping installations Figure B 6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control Temperature sensor 1 2 3 valve manifold Temperature controller Differential pressure thermostat transmitter amp Insulated enclosure Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC
204. ing units for digital readout Pounds per Square Inch is selected engineering units for digital readout Transmitter is absolute pressure type Digital readout represents absolute values Stick On Label not shown Selected engineering unit equals one of these units which is available as a stick on label from Honeywell drawing number 30756918 001 Kpa Kilopascals Mpa Megapascals mbar Millibar bar Bar g cm2 Grams per Square Centimeter Kg cm2 Kilograms per Square Centimeter mmH20O Millimeters of Water inHg Inches of Mercury mH20O Meters of Water Typical operation Table 51 summarizes typical Local Smart Meter indications Note that Indications other combinations of status messages are possible Continued on next page 164 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continuec Typical operation indications continued Table 51 summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications Meter Indication EIN Meter Indication What It Means No power Meter has applied detected transmitter output that is not a number Normal display Display range is for transmitter in Over Limit Upper Analog mode value is with digital 19 990 000 and readout in transmitter output 2 inches of water is over 100 ANALOG In H50 Normal display Transmitter is in for transmitter in output mode DE mode 2 square readout show output Digital 0
205. installed 1n the conduit within 18 inches of the transmitter Crouse Hinds type EYS EYD or EYSX EYDX are examples of LISTED explosionproof seals that meets this requirement Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I Division 1 Group B C or D Hazardous Classified Locations do not require an explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit NOTE Installation should conform to all national and local electrical code requirements When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location keep covers tight while the transmitter is energized Disconnect power to the transmitter in the non hazardous area prior to removing end caps for service When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous Location disconnect power to the transmitter in the non hazardous area or determine that the location is non hazardous prior to disconnecting or connecting the transmitter wires Continued on next page 46 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Existing meter Existing analog meters and 5 3000 Smart Meters can be connected to connections Analog Meter Smart Meter New Smart Meter with Local Zero and Span Release 300 transmitters Examples of each meter type are shown below Analog Meter Connections Y ou can connect the analog meter 2 wires integrally to Release 300 transmitter s terminal block inside the
206. inued Press Increase A button to set digit to 1 or 1 digit value setting is set to 1 Decrease button to set it to BLANK Honeywell 00 19990 ANALOG Press to set 1 Press to set 1 digit as BLANK digit as 1 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in 1 Readout now displays sign segment which will digit and activate sign segment be BLANK for positive values unless upper value was set for negative values before Press Increase A button to set sign segment to minus sign for negative values or Decrease button to set it to BLANK for positive Honeywell values Sign segment is BLANK for positive values and minus sign for negative values Continued on next page 118 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in current Display goes blank for a 1 2 second and settings as upper display value and return to returns to display readout equal to 50 previous display Upper display limit setting is output now complete In this example readout is 9 990 000 CUSTOM unit for 5090 display range of 0 to 19 990 000 CUSTOM for transmitter with ATTENTION For CUSTOM unit in LINEAR output transmitter with LINEAR output you must set both lower and upper display limits for
207. ion 3 0 or greater and Release 300 Series 900 transmitters with software version b 0 or greater See the procedure on page 50 to use the SFC to check your transmitter s software version Release 300 transmitters can be identified by the R300 designation on the nameplate Except for optional zero and span adjustments the ST 3000 has no physical adjustments You need an SFC to make any adjustments in an ST 3000 transmitter Alternately certain adjustments can be made through the Universal Station if the transmitter is digitally integrated with a Honeywell TPS system or through a PC running Honeywell SCT 3000 software Table 1 illustrates the present ST 3000 pressure transmitter family Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model Differential 5 STD1xx STD9xx Pressure Differential Pressure STF1xx STF9xx with Flange on One Side Dual Head Gauge Not Available STG9xx Pressure In Line Gauge STG1xL STG9xL Pressure Gauge and Absolute STG1xx STG9xx Pressure STA1Xx STA9xx Continued on next page 6 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family continued Transmitter Type Series 1
208. ion See Page 11 1 Introduction 11 2 Overview 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC Display 11 4 Diagnostic Messages 11 5 Running Status Check 11 6 Interpreting Messages 11 7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard About this section This section identifies diagnostic messages that may appear in the SFC and describes what they mean An interpretation of diagnostic messages is given which suggests possible cause and corrective action for each message Procedures are provided for running a status check and testing the SFC keyboard 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 195 11 2 Overview Diagnostics The SFC and ST 3000 transmitter are constantly running internal diagnostics to monitor the functions and status of the control loop and their communications link When a diagnostic failure 18 detected a corresponding message 18 generated for the SFC display See Section 11 4 Diagnostic Messages for details There are additional diagnostics provided by the STIMV IOP for transmitters integrated with the TPS system and any message will appear in the TRANSMITTER STATUS field of the Detail Display in the Universal Station Details about the STIMV IOP diagnostic messages are given in the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration Manual PM12 410 which is part of the TDC 30003 system bookset Troubleshooting tool Your primary troubleshooting tool is using the SFC to run a status check recording di
209. ipe plugs 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 long 1 2 pipe cross with 2 pipe plugs 1 2 shut off valve thru port type desirable 1 2 seamless pipe slope at least 1 per foot downward 1 2 shut off valve thru 1 2 seamless pipe port type desirable short as possible to reduce head effect 1 2 pipe union 39 or coupling lt 4 1 2 3 valve 4 Process pressure manifold transmitter standard type Differential pressure transmitter Continued on next page 238 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Sealing liquid method continued Figure B 2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid 1 2 shut off valve thru port type desirable 1 2 pipe cross with 2 pipe plugs 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 1 2 pipe cross lon 4 1 2 seamless pipe g with 2 pipe plugs slope at least 1 1 2 seamless per foot downward lt q 1 2 seamless pipe short as possible to ue reduce head effect 1 2 shut off 1 2 pipe union valve thru port or coupling type desirable 4 1 2 3 valve Process pressure manifold transmitter standard type Differential pressure transmitter Make both HP and LP connections as shown The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify th
210. iping shut off valve and diaphragm seal distance must be as short as possible and insulated along with the process pipe or vessel Shut off valve Process pressure transmitter with Pipe union or metal diaphragm coupling seal Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process interfaces bodies than at their electronics Normally it is impractical to heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250 F 107 to 121 C without radiant and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics normally 200 F 93 C Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating coils and thermostats set at 200 F 93 C can assure viscosity of fluids which freeze below 180 F 82 C while assuring safe transmitter operation For water or similar lower temperature mediums the control can be set at 50 F 10 C to save energy and call for heat only when temperature and wind conditions require Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled continuous electric heating to prevent water freezing at 0 F 189 20 mph wind velocity while not exceeding 225 F 107 C at the transmitter body at 90 F 32 C ambient and zero wind velocity The operating costs in energy for these systems usually exceed the high initial cost of the thermostat systems Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100 F 38 C without thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will normally exceed the body temperature rat
211. ired 42 Vdc max Intrinsically Safe for Class Groups A B amp D Class Il Groups E F amp G Class Divisions 1 T4 at 40 C T3A at 93 C maximum ambient Install per Honeywell drawing 51204242 Suitable for Class 11 amp 111 Division 2 Groups A C D E F amp G hazardous locations T4 at 93 C 42 Vdc max Environmental Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations Encl 4X CSA Certified Barriers 4 Class I II III Division 1 and 2 Groups 1 Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204242 258 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations About IEC The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus identified These recommendations are found within IEC 79 0 through 79 15 and 79 28 For all EC countries as well as various neighboring countries CENELEC member states the European Standards EN 50 014 to EN 50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus They were established on the basis of the IEC However these recommendations are much more detailed by comparison Zones Within IEC7 10 hazardous locations are categorized into one of these three zones Description of Hazardous Location Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously or is prese
212. k C Factory configured per user supplied data UJ F Teflon process head gasket Viton is standard Wired on stainless steel customer tag 4 lines 28 characters per line customer supplied information U Over pressure leak test with F3392 certificate T1 or T2 1 2 inch NPT Hastelloy C adapter flange for process head Viton head gaskets 1 2 inch adapter gaskets are special V1 or V2 1 2 inch NPT Monel adapter flange for process head Write protection W Additional warranty for 1 year W NO Additional warranty for 2 years W C2 Additional warranty for 3 years W N Additional warranty for 4 years S Local Zero and Span adjustments None Continued on next page 234 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 1 Table Ill Options Reference continued Codes and descriptions Then transmitter option 15 FM approval body certification for continued If Code is 09 NO c oO N 2 09 4G 4H Explosionproof Flameproof Class Division 1 Groups A B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class ll Ill Division 1 Groups E F Non Incendive Class l Division 2 Groups A B C D Intrinsically Safe Class Il IIl Division 1 Groups C D E F FM approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups C D
213. kground Procedure Calibrating Range with SFC ATTENTION The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter has two point calibration This means when you calibrate two points in the calibration range all the points in that range adjust to that calibration The procedure in Table 58 shows the steps for calibrating a differential pressure DP type transmitter to a range of 0 to 200 2 for example purposes This procedure assumes that the transmitter 1s removed from the process and located in a controlled environment You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0 04 or better to do a range calibration Note that we factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of water ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39 2 F 4 C Table 59 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect power supply and SFC to signal See Figure 52 for typical SFC power terminals on transmitter s terminal block supply and pressure source hookup Connect a calibration standard pressure for calibration source to high pressure side of DP type transmitter 2 Turn on power supply and allow transmitter to stabilize its operation for approximately 30 minutes Turn on SFC 4 DE READ Does not apply for bench calibration 5 NON VOL Tlale Niol
214. l mode This means transmitter is in analog mode of operation Asks if you want to change to analog er eee mode This means transmitter is in DE digital mode of operation 2 iL DINE 15111 13191919 Exits analog to DE change function No 1 11111111 3 t Ti INT T 15111 13161616 Initiates shift key selection 5 9 ter ET s 191 517 elj Both SFC and XMTR software 4 5 X M T R 3 versions appear in display Note that only SFC version appears when SFC is not connected to transmitter or SHIFT and ID keys have not yet been pressed for transmitter in DE mode 4 CLR t Ti INT 15111 13191916 Exit function SFC is READY for NO RE Alp v 1 1 1 next operation Analog and DE modes the analog transmission mode the transmitter sends a proportional 4 to 20 milliampere output signal that can be used as a compatible analog input signal to a controller or a recorder in the control room Continued on next page 54 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 5 3 Making Initial Checks Continued Analog and DE modes continued Software version compatibility Write protect option A transmitter in the digital DE mode can communicate in a direct digital fashion with Honeywell s TPS system and Allen Bradley PLCs The digital signal can incl
215. l Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation Attention Dotted area indicates use das with closed tank with reference leg 25 Maximum Level Variable Reference Head H1 Minimum Level SH i HP Side mounted LP Side vented to tank to atmosphere Continued on next page 32 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Flush mounting ATTENTION To mount a flush mounted model cut a hole for a 1 standard pipe in the tank or pipe where the transmitter 1s to be mounted Weld the 1 mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and secure with the locking bolt Tighten the bolt to a torque of 8 1 to 13 5 6 to 10 ft lb Figure 11 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe Once the transmitter is mounted the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position See Table 9 Step 4 for details On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the mounting sleeve Figure 11 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation 1 Pipe Mount 316 SS Weld Nipple standard option Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC
216. l STS103 User s Manual 15 6 5 Background ATTENTION Adjusting Damping Time You can adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise We suggest that you set the damping to the smallest value that 1s reasonable for your process The electrical noise effect on the output signal 15 partially related to the turndown ratio of the transmitter As the turndown ratio increases the peak to peak noise on the output signal increases You can use this formula to find the turndown ratio using the range information for your transmitter Turndown Ratio Upper Range Limit Upper Range Value Lower Range Value Example The turndown ratio for 400 inH5O transmitter with a range of 0 to 50 would be 400 8 Turndown Ratio 50 0 or 8 1 Procedure The procedure in Table 23 outlines the keystrokes used to adjust the damping time to two seconds as an example Table 23 Adjusting Damping Time Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 C IDTATMTPT RT T 13101111 Present damping time in seconds 2 A Djam P 111 T Pit 13191111 Message exchange is working NEXT WJOIRIKI I INIGI IDTATMTPT 111 1 TPIT 13191111 Next highest damping time value in CTT lel seconds ATTENTION The NEXT key raises the setting while the PREV key lowers the setting Or you can key in a number that will be converted to closest
217. l STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons Background The local smart meter can be set to show the PV out in engineering units that are appropriate for your process application You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower display limit settings for the local smart meter s digital readout using buttons on the face of the meter Using the Smart Meter Follow these guidelines when configuring the local smart meter e If you initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed on the local smart meter the local smart meter will respond to the command it receives last In other words the last command wins e most cases you can press and release a button for one shot operation or press and hold a button for continuous 1 2 second repetitive operation e Active setup field will begin to flash at one second rate if next action is not initiated within one second And if no action is taken within 30 seconds the setup function will time out and the meter will return to its previous state Table 31 shows an illustration of the local smart meter and a description of the pushbuttons on the meter face Table 31 Smart Meter Pushbutton Description VAR SEL Not functional when installed with ST 3000 transmitters _ SPAN Selects Span range setting URV 7 v 7 2 Selects Zero range setting LRV 0 100 UPPER VALUE Select
218. l Station are given the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration Manual PM12 410 which is part of the TDC 30003 system bookset Depending upon the type of calibration you choose you may need any of Required the following test equipment to accurately calibrate the transmitter e Digital Voltmeter or milliammeter with 0 02 accuracy or better SFC Smart Field Communicator e Calibration standard input source with a 0 02 accuracy e 250 ohm resistor with 0 01 tolerance or better 184 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal Background You can calibrate the transmitter s analog output circuit at its 0 and 100 levels by using the transmitter in its constant current source mode It is not necessary to remove the transmitter from service Procedure Table 57 The procedure in Table 57 shows the steps for calibrating the output signal for a transmitter in the analog mode Note that the procedure 1s similar for a transmitter the DE mode but the SFC must be used to read the output in percent in place of the milliammeter or voltmeter readings Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter Analog Mode Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and turn it on Connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter 0 02 accuracy or better in loop to check readings See Figure 38 for sample test equip
219. l for fixed or constant head H2 STR13D high pressure HP side of transmitter to upper flange mounting on tank wall for fixed or constant head H2 ATTENTION On insulated tanks accommodate the flange extension remove enough insulation to Tighten bolts to torque of 45 4 to 54 2 N m 35 to 40 Ib ft Figure 13 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation LP Side Model STR93D Model STR12D HP Side Model STR13D Y NR H2 Fixed Ref Leg Model STR93D Model STR12D LP Side Model STR13D Maximum Level Variable Head H1 Minimum Level 36 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Piping arrangements The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process measurement requirements and the transmitter model Except for flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections process connections are made to inch inch NPT female connections in the process head of the transmitter s meter body For example a differential pressure transmitter comes with double ended process heads with 4 inch NPT connections but they can be modified to accept gt inch NPT through optional flange adapters Some gauge pressure transmitters may have a inch NPT connection which mounts directly to a process pipe The most common type of pipe used is gt inch schedule 80 steel
220. l point and zeros for a whole number 3 NON VOL CTRIVT RET T felt 13191111 Message exchange is working ENTER 21 WJOJRIKITINIG es 111 T T Plt 13191111 New LRV setting stored in s lele e o H 2 O 3 9 F transmitter s working memory 4 F 7 T T TPPT Present URV setting Pressure for 11110151 19101 1 1 12101 13191 20 mAdc 100 output Continued on next page 80 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 7 Procedure 1 continued Setting Range Values Using SFC continued Table 25 Keying in LRV and URV continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 R 9181 1 1 7 7 yet spen s Key in 45 as desired URV setting 4 1141 1111 1 1 21091 413191 111 TPIT 13191111 11415111 FH 2191 1391 6 NON VOL F UTRIVT RET T felt 13191111 Message exchange is working ENTER 21 WJOJRIKITINIG Yes UjRIVI 1 1 1 1 131011111 URV setting stored in 1415 010101 j jHj2j0 3 9 F transmitter s working memory Keystroke 1 summary Figure 30 shows keystroke summary for keying in LRV and URV for quick reference Figure 30 Keystroke Summary for Keying in LRV and URV ENTER Yes 22510 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 81 6 7 Procedure 2 Sett
221. lay limit setting time out after thirty seconds the meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous settings The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting either lower or upper depending upon which limit you set first 3 If you change the transmitter s output conformity you must reconfigure the local smart meter as outlined Table 30 After making any adjustments to the smart meter keep the transmitter powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration 1s written to non volatile memory If power 18 turned off before 30 seconds the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter power 18 restored the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings Procedure The procedure in Table 30 outlines the steps for setting up the configuration for a Local Smart Meter using an SFC Table 30 setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 B Isit Calls up first configuration prompt M 2 A Isit Calls up next configuration prompt NEXT t eir Cloinifiilgl Prompt asks if you want to access meter configuration function If you want to access it go to Step 3 If you do not want to access it press CLR key to exit function or
222. lay or Action Description 11 hi aif SlA viE Answer yes to prompt and initiate ENTER 515101 9 0181 111 961 1 1111 database save function es is A vie T Database saved to SFC HOLD DAT 111111 memory 1 5 5 21111141 12 Disconnect SFC and connect to loop Be sure to put analog loop into wiring for transmitter whose database is manual mode to be restored ATTENTION Be sure to leave SEC power on The saved database will be lost if the SFC power is turned off 13 Be sure any switches that trip iT R Pls 5 1 0 212 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 14 E 101 111111111 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER iIS F c W olRIK I NIG and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter without a tag iL 1 TJA G number ID whose database is to 111111111 11111111 be restored 15 B 11 5111 101 1 1611 Call up first configuration parameter 5 11111 16 Callup next configuration NEXT 1 Clo nifji g parameter 17 AC 15111 101 1 111611 11 Call up next configuration NEXT jSjEjNJSJOJR TjEMPP parameter
223. lines the steps for starting up an absolute pressure AP type transmitter in a pressure measurement application Refer to Figure 47 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 47 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter Shut off valve no 1 Pipe Plug Union 7 M Absolute Pressure 1 NG Transmitter Shut off ES valve no 2 9 MAS Process Tee connector CA For additional overrrange protection use Sprague engineering type gauge saver or Fairchild model 95 gauge guard style 1 ATTENTION For AP transmitters you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate Table 44 starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Set process pressure to zero level Allow system to stabilize at zero pressure 3 DE READ Tralee 1 101 111111111 Be sure any switches that may trip i Ts elc u R E b
224. lt Intrinsic Safety Pressurized Keeps flammable gases out Encapsulation m Zone 1 amp 2 Keeps flammable gases out Increased Safety Zone 1 amp 2 No arcs sparks or hot surface Zone 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Powder Filled Non sparking nA Zone 2 No arcs sparks or hot surfaces under normal conditions nC Zone 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Limited Energy nA Zone 2 Limits energy of sparks and surface temperature under normal conditions Restricted Breathing Keeps flammable gases out Enclosed Break Oil Immersion Zone 1 amp 2 Keeps flammable gases out Continued on next page 260 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations continued IEC Temperature Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous Classification location must also be classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to the maximum operating ambient of the equipment The maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in the following table Maximum Temperature Temperature Degrees C Degrees F Identification Number Certification and Conformity Details Table
225. ly equivalent zero and span pressures to make the local adjustments zero and span adjustments This is similar to setting the LRV and URV to applied pressures using the SFC ATTENTION After making any adjustments to the Smart Meter keep the transmitter powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration 1s written to non volatile memory If power 18 turned off before 30 seconds the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter power 18 restored the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings Procedure The procedure in Table 27 shows the steps for setting the range values to applied pressures using local zero and span adjustments See Figure 32 for typical local adjustment connections and setup details Table 27 setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments Step Action 1 Turn OFF transmitter power Loosen end cap lock and remove end cap from terminal block side of electronics housing Observing polarity connect a milliammeter across positive and negative TEST terminals ATTENTION you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustment option you may use the Local Smart Meter in place of the milliammeter Continued on next page 84 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments continued Procedure continued Table 27 setting Range Values Using L
226. m nameplate plus R300 30756445 508 Gasket Kit 0 rings 51204496 001 3161 SS Mounting Sleeve Kit 51204497 001 Calibration Sleeve Kit Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 223 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 63 series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body Extended Flange Design Pseudo Flange Design Continued on next page 224 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 78 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 63 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate plus R300 Series 100 replacement meter body 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate Series 900 replacement meter body plus R300 30749372 005 O ring seal 1 30749372 001 O ring seal 1 Optional Flange Adapter Not Shown 30754419 006 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts 30754419 008 30754419 022 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapter with 316 st steel bolts 30754419 024 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapter with 316 st steel bolts K1 Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1
227. ment hookup ATTENTION Be sure the accuracy of the resistor is 0 0196 or better for current measurements made by voltage drop DE READ THATS Njo 81 85 1 R JEJDI Be sure any switches that may trip alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 BON Tlale INIo TL T T T T TL T T Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER IS F c W olRIKI IINIG and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 ATS INO PEEL Ter Behr 4 INPUT 111 T 13101113 Display shows current transmitter m 5 IwloiRI K NIG output level and it will update every PUT six seconds Be sure to time your 3 13101111 next key press with an updated 11 12121 14101 54111111 J display 5 2 101 111 TRITT 13101111 Key in O zero as desired output 1191 1111 111 5 1 111 signal level in percent 6 NON VOL FT T felt 13101111 Put transmitter into constant current ENTER 5 1 6 source mode as noted by sign in Yes display and set output to 096 11 13101111 8 Jej ojo j j jr Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 185 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal Continued Procedure continued
228. mitter when either signal 1s generated The failsafe direction display that you can access through the SFC only shows the state of the failsafe jumper in the transmitter as it correlates to analog transmitter operation The failsafe action of the digital control system may be configured to operate differently than indicated by the state of the jumper in the transmitter The procedure in Table 47 outlines the steps for cutting the failsafe direction jumper on the transmitter s PWA Figure 49 shows the location of the failsafe direction jumper on the PWA of Release 300 transmitters The nature of the integrated circuitry used in the transmitter s PWA makes it susceptible to damage by stray static discharges when it 1s removed from the transmitter Follow these tips to minimize chances of static electricity damage when handling the PWA e Never touch terminals connectors component leads or circuits when handling the PWA e When removing or installing the PWA hold it by its edges or bracket section only If you must touch the PWA circuits be sure you are grounded by staying 1n contact with a grounded surface or wearing a grounded wrist strap e As soon as the PWA is removed from the transmitter put it in an electrically conductive bag or wrap it in aluminum foil to protect it Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 155 8 3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction continued
229. mperature is too Take steps to insulate meter body S E N s o R o v E R T E M P high Accuracy and life span may from temperature source decrease if it remains high s T A T uls P T 3 0 111118 Transmitter s temperature sensor Replace transmitter 8 6 8 T E M P has failed TlA G SFC is operating incorrectly Try communicating again If error is F c still exists replace SFC iolu T P 1111 PIT 131 01111 Input data seems wrong Could Put transmitter in output mode and be a process problem but it press STAT key Diagnostic could also be a meter body or messages should identify where PWA problem problem is If no other diagnostic message is given condition is most likely meter body related Check installation and replace meter body if condition persists IS A viE R E s T O R E On database restore transmitter Nothing SFC tried to restore as Mi siM A T c H types do not match much of database as possible Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 205 11 6 Interpreting Messages continued Interpretation table continued Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table continued Message Possible Cause What to Do 5 015 810118 UNKNOWN 1111111
230. n 30753908 112 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head model STD110 only 30753908 113 Process head assembly kit st steel head model STD110 only 30753908 114 Process head assembly kit carbon steel DIN head model STD110 only 30753908 115 Process head assembly kit st steel DIN head model STD110 only K1 Pipe plug 2 K2 Vent plug 1 K3 Vent bushing 1 K6 Gasket Viton process head 1 K11 Gasket PTFE flange adapter 1 K5 Process head 1 Figure 58 series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 amp STD930 A B E F and J Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 217 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 72 Parts Identification for Callouts Figure 58 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 K1 30757506 001 Head bolts carbon steel 6 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 001 Head bolts stainless steel NACE 6 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 2 30757147 0011 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757147 002 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757148 001 Replacement h
231. n 8 4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display About this section This section identifies how to access typical data associated with the operation of an ST 3000 transmitter It also includes procedures for e Changing the default failsafe direction e Writing data in the scratch pad area e Saving and Restoring a database and e Monitoring optional Local Smart Meter display 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 151 8 2 Accessing Operation Data Summary You can access this data relevant to the operation of the transmitter using an SFC e Input e Output e Span e Upper Range Limit e Status e Failsafe Output Direction e Sensor Temperature e Scratch Pad Messages e PROM Serial Number Procedure Table 46 summarizes the keystrokes required to access given operation data from the transmitter using an SFC These keystrokes assume that SFC communications have been established with the transmitter by pressing the 10 key The values shown in displays are for example purposes only Table 46 summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access IF you want to view THEN use these keystrokes the present input pressure which is updated every six pa Pp seconds INPUT J OUT N PJUT 1 j3jo t t ETE mersus 11 P T 131 19 ee the present t
232. n display Press UPPER VALUE button again within 5 Display shows magnitude range selection seconds Otherwise meter exits limit setting function Honeywell 19 99 ANALOG ATTENTION The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the display limits This selection does not affect the normal operation of the meter During normal operation the display is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible Continued on next page 114 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase A button to call up next available magnitude range selection or Decrease button to call up previous magnitude range selection NOTE This action enables the multiplier K for indicating larger ranges and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or right depending on which button is pushed The display shows largest positive number for given range selection so you can select a range that is just larger than the range to be set for best display precision Hold respective key to scroll forward or backward through the selections Repeat this action until desired selection is on display For example purposes only largest range 19990K is selected in this procedure Press UPPER VALUE button
233. n most cases you can readily remove the process head or heads from the transmitter s meter body to clean the process head cavity and inspect the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms For flange mount and remote seal diaphragms you may only need to run a purge line the tank to rinse off the face of the diaphragm Procedure The procedure in Table 53 outlines the general steps for inspecting and cleaning barrier diaphragms You may have to modify the steps to meet your particular process or transmitter model requirements Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Step Action 1 Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process Open vent in process head to drain fluid from transmitter s meter body if required ATTENTION we recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart 2 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter body Remove process heads and bolts Nuts O ring Bolts Process head O ring oN A section Process head amp Continued next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 171 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Procedure continued Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Step Action 3 Remove O ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and sui
234. n remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA oet PWA aside Mounting Screws PWA Connector Side Mounting Bracket Orient mounting bracket as noted above install mounting screws through bracket and replacement PWA and install retainers to hold screws in place Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 as applicable to install PWA and bracket to transmitter housing We recommend that you lubricate end cap O ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning 33 or equivalent before you replace end cap ATTENTION Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper viewing through end cap window You can rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments 10 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power 11 If applicable verify Local Smart Meter configuration data Reconfigure selected engineering units and lower and upper display range values as required See Subsections 6 11 and or 6 12 for details 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 177 9 5 Procedure Replacing Meter Body You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or only the meter body on selected DP GP and AP transmitters by using the existing process head s Use the procedure in Table 56 to install a meter body only Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only Step Action 1 Complete first 3 Steps in Table 55 as applicable to remove PWA Use 4 mm si
235. n the display press the key and then the CLR key to remove the transmitter from the current output mode or press the stat key to check the operating status of the transmitter INPUT J our 12108115 ET TT xample DUG Gm CCT islet 16 2 11121 CLR DUG GEE ORE NO JPjT e Be sure to store all changes in the transmitters non volatile memory by pressing the SHIFT key and then the ENTER key Example 11111 1 51 1 1 11111 NON VOL ENTER PIT 101111 5 F C 1919 PIT 13101111 JNJO N V O L AT LIN 101 PIT lejoi R E P Y EL 1 LE LLL WARNING e Be sure to disconnect the SFC leads from the transmitter before unplugging them from the SFC Be sure the SFC is disconnected from a transmitter in the analog mode before returning the loop to the automatic operating mode 122 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Section 7 Startup 7 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Startup Tasks Running Analog Output Check Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank Liquid
236. nal continued Procedure continued Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 17 111 1 1310111118 Gradually decrease output to 20mA PREV 01 1 11 1111 1610191 4 1151 or 5V a Repeat this Step as required 0 1 1 P T 31011119 5 WJOJRIK TINIG 1 P T 3 0 4 1 jDjEJC RJE AJS E D 2 0 1 P T j3jo t 1 C jOJRJRJEJC T DJAJC 18 FAT T elt 3 Initiate shift key selection PET NOV Saves data in transmitter s 1 T 31011 11 8 ENTER re were t nonvolatile memory This takes Yes approximately 8 seconds 1 P T NJOIN VjOJL AIT JE peje 3 0 1 1 1 11 1 1111111 19 191 111 1 felt 131911115 Call up output for display OUT 5 WJOJRJK TINIG PUT 1 P T jhi Present output si put signal level in percent 20 191 111 1 felt loli Exit constant current source mode CLR NO STF ic JPjT 18 111111111 188 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 10 4 Bac
237. nd SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 157 8 4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area continuec Procedure continued Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 A 5 1111 1 Return to first group of 16 NEXT 2293 characters 8 51 Plajo 3 7 T Move cursor to 10th character 3 ETSETISI 9 51 1111 1 Change 3 to 6 to reflect revised CIA 181 221198 calibration date 10 11111111 Save changes in message 5 TIC HL 1 ee 1 1 1 1 1111111 Exit scratch pad without saving changes in message 158 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database Background If it ever became necessary to replace a damaged transmitter with a spare you could save the configuration database from the damaged transmitter to the HOLD memory in the SFC and then restore the saved configuration database from the HOLD memory in the spare transmitter In fact you could restore the saved configuration database 1n any number of transmitters as long as you change the tag number ID in the restored database NOTE The configuration data for the
238. ng Analog Output Signal continued Procedure continued Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 12 V 0191 1 111 1 Plt 1310111118 Key in 100 as desired output level in PTE eT percent X 0 11 1 P T 3 0 4 1 11110 11111 611111 2 _ 1 PT 13 NON VOL 191 111 1 felt a o 1 1 e Set output to 10096 ENTER SF ic WIORJK TING es 1 P T 31011119 1111212 jeje 411111 14 RESET 191 111 T felt 1310111118 Calibrate output to 100 Wie 0 11 1 P T 31011119 11 JDJAJC S P AIN 15 Check that milliammeter or voltmeter reading is 20mA or SV If reading Then correct go to Step 18 lower than go to Step 16 20mA or 5V higher than go to Step 17 20mA or 5V 16 ay T elt 3 Gradually raise output to 20mA or H A NEXT 1 popu TP 1 eT 5 1 1 31011118 1210 mA 1 c jojR R EjC T JDJAJC JS PJAIN 5V reading Repeat this Step as required Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 187 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Sig
239. ngs are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 13 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 143 7 9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter Procedure ATTENTION The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge pressure GP type transmitter in a pressure or liquid level measurement application Refer to Figures 45 and 46 for the flush mount transmitter arrangement and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections For the procedure in Table 43 we are assuming that piping arrangement includes a block off valve and a Tee connector If your piping does not include a Tee connector you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate Figure 45 Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter Flush Mount Transmitter 1 Pipe Mount 316 SS Weld Nipple Process standard option Figure 46 Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter 2 2 oo 77 Maximum Level Flush Mount Transmitter Minimum Level 144 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 44 out
240. nt Temp Code 07 T6 at Ta 65 C Maximum Ambient Continued on next page 262 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 D 3 Enclosure Ratings NEMA and IEC Recognition IEC Classifications NEMA Standards IEC Designations The NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association enclosure classifications are recognized in the US The IEC Publication 529 Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications The following paragraphs provide a discussion of the Comparison Between NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and IEC Enclosure Classification Designations IEC Publication 529 Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures provides a system for specifying the enclosures of electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by the enclosure IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against mechanical damage of equipment risk of explosion or conditions such as moisture produced for example by condensation corrosive vapors fungus or vermin NEMA Standards Publication 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum does test for environmental conditions such as corrosion rust icing oil and coolants For this reason and because the tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical the IEC enclosure classification designations cannot be exactly equ
241. nt for long periods Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation and if it does occur it will exist for a short period only IEC Groups Flammable gases vapors and mists are further classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most easily ignitable mixture within air Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres it may be used within as follows Group Description of Atmosphere IIC Atmospheres containing acetylene hydrogen fuel and combustible process gases or vapors of equivalent hazard IIB Atmospheres such as ethyl ether ethylene or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard IA I Atmospheres such as acetone benzene butane cyclopropane ethanol gasoline hexane methanol methane natural gas naphtha propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 259 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations continued IEC Methods of The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use Protection in given locations Protection Concept Permitted Use Flameproof Zone 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Zone 0 1 amp 2 Limits energy of sparks under 2 faults Intrinsic Safety EE EN Zone 1 amp 2 Limits energy of sparks under 1 fau
242. nt with SFC 148 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data 85 2 2224222041222440000040000505095000000000005 54 52 Direction Jumper sidere ER IER EIN 156 Writing Data in Scratch Pad 157 Savine and Restornb a Databases rm A 160 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual Tables Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table D 1 Table D 2 Table D 3 Table D 4 Table D 5 Table D 6 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51 163 summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications 0 01 1 165 Possible Smart Meter Emor Odes ais 166 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms 171 Process Head Bolt Torque RAUNO Ead 174 ea 175 Replacing Meter Body Only EA PR
243. o contact with the transmitter meter body As a general rule there is a 56 degree C drop 100 degree F in the temperature of the process for every foot of gt inch uninsulated piping Process connections Table 13 describes typical process connections for a given type of transmitter Table 13 Process Connections Transmitter Type Process Connection Differential Pressure e Process heads with 1 4 inch NPT female connection e Flange adapters and manifolds with 1 2 inch female connection are optional e Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2 or 3 inch ANSI class 150 flange Gauge Pressure Process head with 1 2 inch NPT female connection Series 100 e In line 1 2 inch NPT female connection STGxxL e Process heads with 1 4 inch NPT female connection ST G9x4 e Flange adapters and manifolds with 1 2 inch female connections are optional STG9x4 e 2 inch Sanitary Tri Clamp STGxxT e Flush mount in 1 inch weld sleeve with O ring and locking bolt STGxxP Absolute Pressure Process head with 1 2 inch NPT female connection STAx22 x40 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Small flange 1 2 inch 1 1 7 and 2 inch STFxxT 3 4 inch flange with flush or 2 4 or 6 inch extended diaphragm See Table 14 on high pressure side 2 3 inch flange with pseudo flush diaphragm See Table 14 on either high or low pressure side e Sanitary 3 A approved flange de
244. o select desired pre programmed engineering units through the SFC prompt UNITS 1 Select desired pre programmed engineering units through SFC prompt UNITS Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 67 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration decision summary continued Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration continued Determine Lower Range Value LRV and Upper Range Value URV to be used for setting range values See procedure in Table 25 or 26 for range setting details Set LRV and URV to desired Use LRV and URV keys to call up respective SFC prompts for keying in range values or setting range values to applied pressures values through SFC prompts LRV 1andURvV 1 See procedures in Tables 28 and 29 for DE parameter selections Press SHIFT and MENU ITEM keys to call up DE configuration menu Select appropriate DE configuration parameters through SFC prompt DE CONF continued on next page 68 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration decision summary continued Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration Continued YES Use buttons on face of Local Smart Meter or SFC to select engineering units and range values as applicable See procedures in Tables 33 to 36 for configuring Local Smart Mete
245. ocal Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 3 Loosen end cap lock and remove end cap from PWA side of electronics housing to expose Local Zero and Span assembly or Local Smart meter with Zero and Span adjustments Example Local Zero and Span Assembly Honeywell Example Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustments Honeywell Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 85 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments continued Procedure continued Table 27 setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 4 Turn ON transmitter power and let it warm up for a few minutes Using an accurate pressure source apply desired zero equivalent pressure to transmitter ATTENTION differential pressure transmitters apply pressure to the high pressure head for positive range values or vent both heads to atmosphere for zero If zero is to equal a negative value apply the equivalent pressure to the low pressure head For example if zero is to equal 10 inH2O you would apply 10 inH5O to the low pressure head and vent the high pressure head for the zero adjustment Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA If reading Then is less or greater than 4 mA go to Step 6 is correct go to Step 7 ATTENTION you have the Local Smart Me
246. olts 30754419 004 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 018 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with 316 st steel bolts 30754419 020 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapters with 316 st steel bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg flange adapter 4 K11 Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Flange adapter 2 K12 Filter screen 2 30754419 003 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 019 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st steel bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg optional flange adapter 4 K11 Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Flange adapter 2 Process Head Kits one head with PTFE head gasket 30753908 001 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C head 30753908 002 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C DIN head 30753908 003 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head with side vent drain 30753908 004 Process head assembly kit st steel head with side vent drain 30753908 005 30753908 009 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head without side vent drain 30753908 010 Process head assembly kit stainless steel head without side vent drain 30753908 011 Process head assembly kit Monel head Process head assembly kit stainless steel DIN head without side vent drain 30753908 012 Process head
247. onverter IPIT 5 JOJV EJR TJE MP Meter body temperature is too high 5 015 PjT 810118 11111111 Status is unknown Continued on next page ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 199 11 4 Critical failures Table 62 Diagnostic Messages continued Table 62 summarizes the critical SFC status message displays A critical failure has these effects on SFC operation e Only ID OUTPUT and STATUS functions remain operational e The critical status message 1s displayed for three seconds followed by the applicable status message Run the status check to view messages again e The transmitter s output is driven to its failsafe direction upscale or downscale Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures Message Description 1 810111 Characterization PROM failure ju Te faf 370111 elt 111 18 No temperature compensation data exists for calculations oju r P 1 leit 31011111 elt E C T RJON lt ls gt Transmitter s nonvolatile memory fault oluf tiel faf 370111 elt 111 18 lt gt Transmitter s random access memory RAM fault ju TP faf elt E IC T RJON Transmitt
248. op Resistance resistance is necessary to support ohms 650 communications Loop resistance equals barrier resistance plus 450 wire resistance plus receiver resistance Also 45 volt operation is permitted if not an 250 intrinsically safe installation 0 10 8 16 28 20 6325 28 3 37 0 42 4 Operating Voltage Vdc 21012 Loop wiring is connected to the transmitter by simply attaching the positive and negative loop wires to the positive and negative SIGNAL screw terminals on the terminal block in the transmitter s electronics housing shown in Figure 17 Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the transmitter to earth ground A ground terminal can be optionally added to the outside of the electronics housing While it is not necessary to ground the transmitter for proper operation we suggest that you do so to minimize the possible effects of noise on the output signal and provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge damage Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body certification Refer to section 3 2 CE Conformity Europe Notice for special conditions Optional lightning protection option LP can be ordered for transmitters that will be installed 1n areas highly susceptible to lightning strikes Figure 17 shows the 5 screw terminal block used when the lightning protection option 15 ordered Continued on next page 42
249. or exit the output Irie transmitter is in its output mode mode 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 201 11 5 Running Status Check Procedure The procedure in Table 66 shows how to run a status check using the SFC Table 66 Running a Status Check With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring for Be sure to put analog loop into transmitter whose status is to be manual mode checked 2 DE READ Talci Nol 11111111 Be sure any switches that may trip Ts Ele u R E b alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 101 1111 111111 Confirm that TRIPS are secured 1 and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 peje Taje INO ATTENTION 111111 1 ITI hion If a communications error is detected applicable diagnostic messages will cycle at two second intervals in the display and then display returns to the prompt PUT LOOP IN MAN Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to view messages again Communications is not established and all SFC functions are disabled 4 F S DIR T PAI Initiate status check U STAT SjF kj inje 1 5 015 C HjEJC 10 5
250. p 97 Output Mode Running Analog Output Check 25 Output Signal Indication DE Mode Only 64 Output Signal Mode DE Only Selecting 97 Keystroke Summary 93 Ranges 91 Parameters Configuration 63 Piping 37 Potential Noise Sources 9 Power Supply Voltage Operating Range 42 Pressure Measurement AP Starting Up 45 Pressure Measurement DP Starting Up 131 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement GP Starting Up 140 144 Pressure Ratings 21 Process Connections Summary 39 PWA Replacing 175 266 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 R Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Mounting 35 Replacement parts 209 5 Save and Restore Database 59 Procedure 160 Scratch Pad Area Writing Data 57 sealing Liquid 257 SFC Connecting to Transmitter 50 Disconnecting 122 Display Characteristics 70 Model Designations 9 Purpose 8 SM 3000 Smart Meter connections 47 Smart Meter See Local Smart Meter Smartline Configuration Toolkit 1 Solution Support Center xiv Square Root Output 74 Dropout 75 Selecting 73 ST 3000 Smart Transmitter 2 Startup Procedure Reference 124 Start Up Tasks Reference 16 Status Check Running 202 Steam Heating 244 Superheated Steam 249 Index Tag Number 63 Entering Procedure 7 Keystroke Summary 72 Temperature Limits Operating 20 Transmitter mounting Models STA122 STA922 30 Transmitter options Options 233 Transmitter Types 5 Three Valve
251. pipe Many piping arrangements use a three valve manifold to connect the process piping to the transmitter A manifold makes it easy to install and remove or rezero a transmitter without interrupting the process It also accommodates the installation of blow down valves to clear debris from pressure lines to the transmitter Figure 14 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a three valve manifold and blow down lines for a differential pressure transmitter being used to measure flow Figure 14 Typical 3 Valve Manifold and Blow Down Piping Arrangement To Downstream Tap To Upstream Tap Blow Down VV 3 Valve V Blow Down Valve N Manifold N Valve V Ko Blow Down lt Blow Down i Wc m Low Pressure To High Pressure Side of Transmitter Side of Transmitter To Waste To Waste 21010 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 37 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued Piping arrangements Another piping arrangement uses a block off valve and a tee connector in continued the process piping to the transmitter as shown in Figure 15 Figure 15 Typical Piping Arrangement for 1 2 NPT Process Connection Tank Wall 1 2 NPT Connection Block off Valve Transmitter location Table 12 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the process Table 12 suggested Tran
252. play Values limit to represent the 0 percent LRV output of the transmitter ATTENTION For example purposes the procedures in Tables 35 and 36 assume that the lower value is to be set at 0 and the upper value 16 to be set at 19 990 000 for a CUSTOM unit in a transmitter with a LINEAR output and the transmitter s present output 1s exactly 50 percent Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 109 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display You have completed units selection in Table If lower limit display value was previously set 33 and U L appears on the display Press KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower display flashes in display limit setting function Honeywell wv This procedure is only 7 100 applicable for Custom EUF engineering unit 0 0 0 selection in a transmitter configured for LINEAR output conformity ANALOG The lower display value for transmitters Breviouelyi et configured for SQUARE ROOT output value flashes in conformity is fixed at zero 0 00 and cannot 2 Press LOWER VALUE button again within 5 seconds Otherwise meter exits limit setting function ATTENTION The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the display limit
253. quare root You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for comparison purposes e 100 P pan Where AP Differential pressure input in engineering units Span Transmitter s measurement span URV LRV Pressure input in percent of span P Therefore 100 Flow And you can use the following formula to determine the corresponding current output in milliamperes direct current Flow 16 4 mA dc Output Continued on next page 74 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 4 Selecting Output Form continued About square root output continued Square root dropout Example If you have a differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0 to 100 inches of water with an input of 49 inches of water substituting into the above formulas yields 49 100 100 49 49 56 100 70 Flow and 70 16 4 15 2 mA dc Output To avoid unstable output at readings near zero the ST 3000 transmitter automatically drops square root conformity and changes to linear conformity for low differential pressure readings As shown in Figure 28 the dropout point is between 0 4 and 0 5 of differential pressure input depending on direction Figure 28 square Root Dropout Points Output Flow mA dc of Span Differential Pressure Full Scale 22508 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Mode
254. r calculations Effect will be minor degradation of ambient temperature influence specifications Replace electronics module PWA faf 370111 elt 111 18 8 1 Transmitter s nonvolatile memory fault Replace electronics module PWA ju tiel faf 370111 elt 14151 Transmitter s random access memory RAM fault Replace electronics module PWA faf 370111 elt E Ic T RJON 101 Transmitter s programmable read only memory PROM fault Replace electronics module PWA THATS JAJRJOJUJNJD Communications unsuccessful Check loop wiring and SFC connections If error persists replace transmitter s T A T U S 310118 5 8 CJO RIR SPAN correction factor is outside acceptable limits Could be that transmitter was in output mode Check input pressure and be sure it matches calibrated range value Check meter body Do a URV CORRECT procedure s T A T U S Pit 31011118 5 8 zle r o CIOfRIRI ZERO correction factor is outside acceptable limits Could be that either INPUT was incorrect or transmitter was in output mode during a CORRECT procedure Check input pressure and be sure it matches calibrated range value Check meter body Do an LRV CORRECT procedure JCJOJM M
255. r for operation 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 69 6 2 Overview Continued SFC interface Keep these three basic interface characteristics in mind when you use the characteristics SFC to configure a transmitter e Ifthe displayed prompt contains a cursor you can key in a number or an alphabetic character in that space However to key in an alphabetic character you must first press the NUM ALPHA key to initiate the alphabet selection or alpha mode e Example f foje INO 211111111 1111111 NUM ALPHA 0 Cursor AISI Alpha Mode e Ifthe displayed prompt includes an equal sign you can make another selection after the equal sign by pressing the MENU ITEM key to call up the next selection Note that you can use the A NEXT key to call up the next parameter or the W PREV key to return to the previous parameter e Example DJE Cjo N F 811 39019 MENU ITEM DJE 8 7 310012 If the displayed prompt contains a question mark 2 you can initiate the action in question by pressing the ENTER key to answer yes or abort it by pressing the key to answer no e Example 1 83121111 _ 1114 NON VOL To initiate setting of LRV to applie
256. r line display Made SAVE and RESTORE functions part of configuration menu instead of dedicated keys Configuration parameters for SCM 3000 and SGC 3000 Configuration parameters for SMV 3000 SMV 3000 configuration parameters for superheated steam algorithm and thermocouple inputs Local Smart Meter configuration parameters ATTENTION The keystroke actions and prompt displays referenced in this manual are for the SFC model STS103 While the SFC model STS103 does have a two line instead of a one line display many of the basic keystrokes and configuration parameter prompts for ST 3000 pressure transmitters are identical to those the model STS102 If you will be using a model STS102 SFC you must refer to the SFC Smart Field Communicator Operating Guide 34 ST 11 10 for keystroke details But be aware that transmitter functions will be limited to only those that are supported by the Model STS102 SFC 10 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 1 4 Transmitter SFC Order Order components Figure 5 shows the components that would be shipped and received for a typical ST 3000 transmitter and SFC order Figure 5 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components Ordered Series 100 ST 3000 Differential pressure transmitter with optional mounting bracket Smart Field Communicator with optional battery charger Shipped Received ST 3000 ST 3000 Installation
257. r the smart meter display e When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR you can select only pressure type engineering units See Table 31 e When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT you can select only flow type engineering units GPM and GPH e The percent and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity configuration 2 Additionally the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter s 0 to 100 output e If you select pressure type engineering units you cannot set the lower or upper display limits These values are automatically set when you select the engineering units e Youcan set only the upper display limit when the transmitter 1s configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity The lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 for a transmitter in square root mode and cannot be changed Continued on next page 96 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration continued ATTENTION You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you have selected custom engineering units Custom and the transmitter output conformity 15 set to LINEAR When setting the lower and upper display limits 1f you let either the lower or upper disp
258. ransmitter output in percent which is 111 T 13191111 updated every six seconds PUT 5 IwloiRIKi INIe T opus TPL 1 13101111 116151 17141 1 dA Continued on next page 152 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 8 2 Accessing Operation Data continued Procedure continued Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access continued IF you want to view THEN use these keystrokes the span which is the URV minus the LRV URL SPAN 1 JP T 13101111 121010 010 1 210 13191 the Upper Range Limit of the transmitter SHIFT HIE URL SPAN B foje URES 312111 11510121 ojo 210 13191 the status of transmitter operation at the present time F S DIR STAT 5 015 3011 1 51 5 015 5 Uys foje JPjT _ the present failsafe output direction for the transmitter ATTENTION You can change the default failsafe direction from upscale to downscale See Changing default failsafe direction in this section SHIFT E F S DIR STAT EX f foje JPjT 21111 5 1 11111 F S JOUR PjT 3011 1
259. re freeze protection Transmitters may also require continuous heating if the process fluid is tar wax or other medium which will solidify at normal ambient However uncontrolled steam or electric heating in addition to wasting energy can cause errors and accidentally destroy the transmitter Solution These two basic solutions are possible Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the freezable process fluid out of direct contact with transmitter e Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm days while protecting against freeze ups under the coldest conditions The other paragraphs in this section review a number of methods for implementing both solutions Sealing liquid method simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the transmitter meter body and its impulse piping to the process The small contact interface area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid reduces the mixing of the two fluids You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than the process fluid to inhibit mixing It also must have freezing and boiling temperatures compatible with the range of temperatures existing at the site including the heated interface WARNING The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing liquid with their process fluid A reliable sealing liquid 1s a 50 50 percent by volume solution of ethylene glycol and water Thi
260. res for installing wiring configuring calibrating and troubleshooting the ST 3000 transmitter for quick reference e Smart Field Communicator Model 575103 Pocket Card 34 ST 11 15 One card 1s shipped with every SFC This card provides quick reference of keystroke actions for selected transmitter interface tasks e Smart Field Communicator Model 515103 Operating Guide 34 ST 11 14 One copy 18 shipped with every SFC This document provides detailed SFC information and keystroke actions for interfacing with these Honeywell Smartline Transmitters ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Non Release 300 models STT 3000 Smart Temperature Transmitter MagneW 3000 Smart Electromagnetic Flowmeter SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter e Smartline Configuration Toolkit SCT 3000 Installation and Start up Guide 34 8 10 0 One copy is shipped when the SCT 3000 software application is ordered 12 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 1 5 Local Smart Meter Options Option availability Depending upon your transmitter model it can be equipped with one of the available Local Smart Meter and or Zero and Span Adjust options as shown in Table 3 Table 3 Local Smart Meter Available Options Option Description Available with Transmitter Series Local Smart Meter only Local Zero and Span Adjustments only Honeywell Except draft range model STD110 Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000
261. ressure transmitter as well as the transmitter itself For these applications we must verify the temperature of the heating steam used As an example assume that steam at 100 psig saturated 338 F 170 C 1s to be reduced to 30 psig pressure for the heating system Too frequently it 15 assumed that this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274 F 134 C the temperature of saturated steam at 30 psig Wrong A reduction of the steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam temperature In our example we were talking about saturated steam 1n the main header from the boiler But modern industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste heat go up the stack After reaching the boiling point in the drum the steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas exit extracting additional heat energy and being raised to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure This 1s superheat and depending on boiler design it may amount to 50 to 300 F 10 to 149 C above the saturated steam temperature It also permits packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission from the process Thus in the typical application the problem of steam heating 15 compounded by the additional superheat the main header Specifically when steam 1s reduced in pressure it retains about the same latent heat or the same Btu s pound at the reduced pressure Therefore in our example steam at
262. rns with code reading in engineering units Honeywell ATTENTION you select an invalid code Jw according to the selections in Step 3 the meter display will show an error code Er1 for 9 10 one second and then return to the previous O 1 8 engineering units selection 0 ANALOG In H20 Digital reading now in engineering units of inches of water Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 107 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Selecting Engineering Units continued Table 33 selecting Engineering Units continued If selected engineering unit does not match Use stick on label for engineering units one of six unit indicators on meter peel off without indicators on display matching stick on unit label from sheet drawing number 30756918 001 and paste it in lower right hand corner of meter Stick on label identifies selected engineering units If you selected Custom or Flow engineering Lower and upper display limits have not been units go to Tables 35 and 36 to set lower and set for Custom or Flow engineering units upper display limits for smart meter display 108 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower and The Table 34 shows the restrictions on setting the display values for Upper Display Values given engineering units and ou
263. rocess head bolts with anti seize compound such as Neverseize or equivalent Replace process head or heads and bolts Finger tighten nuts Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration Tighten head bolts in stages of 1 3 full torque 2 3 full torque and then full torque Always tighten head bolts in sequence shown and in these stages 1 1 3 full torque 2 2 3 full torque 3 Full torque Return transmitter to service CAUTION Do not exceed the overload rating when placing the fannie back into service or during cleaning operations See Overpressure ratings in Section 3 of this manual Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 173 9 3 Torque ratings Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Table 54 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type Table 54 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings Transmitter Head Bolt Size Bolt Material Type Carbon Steel A286 Stainless Steel NACE Draft Range M12 x 1 75 18 to 20 Ib ft N A DP Model 24 4 to 27 1 m STD110 7 16 x 20 N A 18 to 20 Ib ft 24 4 to 27 1 N m All Other DP M12 x 1 75 40 to 50 Ib ft N A GP and AP 54 2 to 67 8 m Transmitters 7 16 x 20 N A 40 to 50 Ib ft 54 2 to 67 8 m 3 8 x 16 27 to 31 Ib ft 27 to 31 Ib ft 36 6 to 42 m 36 6 to 42
264. rsion is less indication than 5 0 Analog and Digital DE Changing the mode from analog to mode ST 3000 pressure digital or digital to analog transmitters and STT 3000 configuration parameters for STT temperature transmitters if 3000 and scratch pad SFC software version is 5 0 configuration area for ST 3000 or greater Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 9 1 3 Smart Field Communicator continued SFC Model Differences continued Then it is compatible with And additional functions include Analog and Digital DE mode ST 3000 pressure transmitters STT 3000 temperature transmitters and MagneW 3000 electromagnetic flowmeters Changing the mode from analog to digital or digital to analog Configuration parameters for Magnew 3000 as well as scratch pad configuration area SFC model differences continued Table 2 If SFC model is STS102 STS103 Same as STS102 plus new multivariable transmitters SCM 3000 Smart Coriolis Flowmeter and SGC 3000 Smart Gas Chromatograph SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitters if SFC software version is 4 2 or greater SMV 3000 with superheated steam algorithm and thermocouple input if SFC software version is 4 4 or greater Release 300 Series 100 and 900 ST 3000 pressure transmitters if SFC software version is 5 0 or greater Two line 16 character pe
265. rtline Configuration Toolkit that runs on a variety of Personal Computer PC platforms using MS DOS 5 0 or higher and Windows 3 1 or higher It 1s a bundled Microsoft Windows software and PC interface hardware solution that allows quick error free configuration of Honeywell Smartline field instruments Some SCT 3000 features include e Preconfigured templates that simplify configuration and allow rapid development of configuration databases e Context sensitive help and an on line user manual e Extensive menus and prompts that minimize the need for prior training or experience e The ability to load previously configured databases at time of installation e Automatic verification of device identification and database configuration menus and prompts for bench set up and calibration e The ability to save unlimited transmitter databases on the PC SCT 3000 Release 3 12 2 or greater is compatible with our latest Series 100 and 900 Release 300 ST 3000 transmitters Please contact your Honeywell representative for more information 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 1 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters About the transmitter The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter comes in a variety of models for measurement applications involving one of these basic types of pressure e Differential Pressure e Gauge Pressure e Absolute Pressure The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits an output signal
266. s This selection does not affect the normal operation of the meter During normal operation the display is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible Continued on next page 110 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase A button to call up next Magnitude range selections available magnitude range selection or Decrease button to call up previous magnitude range selection NOTE This action enables the multiplier K for indicating larger ranges and shifts the decimal point of the digital display 1 Q 9 9 left right depending on which button ANALOG is pushed The display shows largest positive number for given range selection so you can select a range Press and folditb Honeywell wR wv vw 7 Press and hold to that is just larger than the range to be scroll backward serollferward set for best display precision Hold respective key to scroll forward or 199 9 backward through the selections 1999 through selections through selections 19 99K Repeat this action until desired selection is on 199 9K The K multiplier indicator appears display 1999K below the digital 19990K reading on the display Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower Readout goes blank e
267. s This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Establishing Communications Making Initial Checks Changing Mode of Operation About this section If you have never used an SFC to talk to an ST 3000 transmitter this section tells you how to establish communications make initial checks and change the transmitter s mode of operation 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 49 5 2 Establishing Communications SFC connection rules e Always plug the SFC leads into the jack on the SFC before you connect them to the transmitter e Use this formula to find the maximum filter capacitance allowed across the sense resistor 250 ohm minimum for SFC communications to work C uF 1000 Rsense Connecting SFC Using either leads with alligator clips or easy hooks supplied with the SFC you connect the SFC directly to signal terminals on the transmitter s terminal block or at any convenient location in the 4 to 20 milliampere line Observing polarity connect the red lead to positive 7 and the black lead to negative WARNING When the transmitter s end cap is removed the housing 18 not explosionproof Figure 19 shows typical SFC connections across loop wiring to the ST 3000 transmitter Non lightning protection terminal connections shown Figure 19 Typical SFC Connections ST 3000 Red 12 1 Li Black Field Terminals S
268. s Upper Range Value setting URV 166 80 UNITS SET Selects engineering units for meter OUTPUT MODE ANALOG display CHECK STATUS 2 FAULT LAST KNOWN VALUE LOWER VALUE Selects Lower Range Value LRV Decrease pushbutton Increase pushbutton Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 103 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration Normally when using a differential type transmitter you can select the transmitter s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications This linear or square root output parameter selection 18 called output conformity output form See Subsection 6 4 for more details When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement there are certain rules to keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection These rules are described in the following paragraphs 1 The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the smart meter display When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR you can select only pressure type engineering units See Table 32 e When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE you can select only flow type engineering units G
269. s for given transmitter series and types are listed in the back of the Installation Guide Part number 34 ST 33 39 for reference Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown in the Specification Sheets for the given transmitter models This section assumes that the mounting dimensions have already been taken into account and the mounting area can accommodate the transmitter Bracket mounting Table 9 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a bracket Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket Step Action 1 If you are using an Then optional mounting bracket go to Step 2 existing mounting bracket go to Step 3 2 Position bracket on 2 inch 50 8 mm horizontal or vertical pipe and install U bolt around pipe and through holes in bracket Secure with nuts and lockwashers provided Example Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical pipe Nuts and Nuts and Lockwashers Lockwashers Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket Horizontal Pipe Vertical Pipe U Bolt Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 27 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Bracket mounting continued Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket continued Step Action 3 Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket and secure with bolts
270. s solution has a specific gravity of 1 070 at 60 F 15 C a freezing temperature of 34 F 36 C and a boiling temperature of 225 F 106 C at atmospheric pressure Conventional antifreeze liquids for automobile coolant systems such as Prestone and Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 237 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Sealing liquid method continued Zerex are solutions of ethylene glycol with some rust inhibitors and possibly leak sealants added they may be used in place of pure ethylene glycol Another sealing liquid used in many chemical plants 1s dibutylphalate an oily type liquid with a specific gravity of 1 045 at 70 F 21 C It has a boiling point 645 F 340 C and does not freeze so it can be used down to about 20 F 30 C Figures 1 and B 2 show typical piping installations for this method The process fluid must be heated above its freezing point This is frequently done by lagging in insulating the connecting nipple shut off valve and connector with the process piping Where the process piping itself requires heating a steam or electric trace 1s run around their components with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing liquid Figure Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 long 1 2 pipe cross with 2 p
271. signed to mount on a 4 inch nominal diameter tank spud with a 2 or 6 inch extension using a 4 inch Tri Clover Remote Diaphragm Seals See Model Selection Guide for description of available Flanged Threaded Chemical Tee Saddle and Sanitary process connections Reference side has standard differential pressure process head Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 39 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued Flange descriptions Table 14 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted liquid level transmitters Table 14 Flange Description Diaphragm Type Description Flush 3 inch 150 lbs serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 152 mm 6 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm 7 1 2 in 3 inch 300 Ibs serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 mm 7 8 in diameter on 168 mm 6 5 8 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 209 mm 8 1 4 in Extended 3 inch 150 Ibs serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 152 mm 6 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm 7 1 2 in 4 inch 150 105 serrated face flange with 8 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 184 mm 7 1 4 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 229 mm 9 in 3 inch 300 Ibs serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 mm 7 8 in diameter on 16
272. smitter Location for Given Process Process Suggested Location Explanation Gases Above the gas line The condensate drains away from the transmitter Liquids 1 Below but close to the 1 This minimizes the static head elevation of the process effect of the condensate connection 2 Level with or above the 2 his requires a siphon to process connection protect the transmitter from process steam The siphon retains water as a fill fluid ATTENTION For liquid or steam the piping should slope a minimum of 25 4 mm 1 inch per 305 mm 1 foot Slope the piping down towards the transmitter 1f the transmitter 1s below the process connection so the bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid If the transmitter is located above the process connection the piping should rise vertically above the transmitter then slope down towards the flowline with a vent valve at the high point For gas measurement use a condensate leg and drain at the low point freeze protection may be required here See Appendix B for some suggested freeze protection solutions Continued on next page 38 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes The operating temperature limits for the device as outlined in Table 5 must not be exceeded Impulse piping may be used to reduce the temperature of the process that comes int
273. splay for meter in transmitter that has no previous meter configuration stored in its memory Honeywell Appears when transmitter is in its Analog mode Display shows code for current engineering units setting EUO ANALOG Continued on next page 106 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Selecting Engineering Units continued Table 33 selecting Engineering Units continued Press Increase A key to call up next code or Selection codes for engineering units Decrease button call up previous code Repeat this action until desired code is on display Honeywell You can hold down the Increase or Decrease key to scroll forward or backward through the codes ATTENTION Remember that if transmitter is configured for SQUARE ROOT output PressandTioldto Press and hold to scroll backward scroll forward conformity the only valid E through selections TM 0 2 EU2 mmHg EUD GPM EUE GPH EU4 KPa EUF Custom EUS MPa EU6 mbar EU7 bar If transmitter is configured for LINEAR output EU8 g cm conformity EUO to EUC and EUF EU mmH O CUSTOM are valid code selections EUB inHg EUC mH O These selections EUD GENT have indicators on EUE GPH the display EUF Custom Press UNITS SET button to lock in selected Goes blank for 1 2 second and retu
274. splayed diagnostic messages and then interpreting the diagnostic messages See Table 66 to run a status check using an SFC You should also use the SFC to verify the transmitter s configuration data and check to be sure your process 1s operating correctly 196 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 About the symbol Procedure Table 60 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC Display When transmitter diagnostics detect a non critical status condition the number symbol appears as the last character in the top row of the SFC display along with whatever you are displaying at the time Thus the purpose of the symbol is simply to let you know that a non critical status condition exists To clear the symbol from the SFC display you must first determine what non critical status condition exists and then correct it The general procedure would be e Press stat key on SFC and record diagnostic messages that appear in bottom row of display e Use Table 60 as an aid in determining the possible cause of the diagnostic message and the suggested corrective action to take to clear the symbol e The symbol will disappear from the display when the diagnostic condition 1s corrected Clearing the Symbol from the SFC Display If Message 15 Then Possible Cause 15 And Suggested Corrective Action 15 5 015 IPT 81011118 cjo R R E C T
275. t page 30 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Precautions for Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans continued For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span you must ensure that the transmitter 1s vertical when mounting it You do this by leveling the transmitter side to side and front to back See Figure 9 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance You must also zero the transmitter by following the steps 1n Table 10 below Table 10 Zero Corrects Procedure for STD110 Step Action 1 Attach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely tighten the mounting bolts Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure HP and low pressure LP heads to eliminate the affects of any surrounding air currents Connect 24 Vdc power to the transmitter and connect a digital voltmeter or SFC to read the transmitter s output See Figures 18 and 38 for typical SFC connection or connect a voltmeter across the 250 ohm resistor if desired Use the SFC and establish communications with the transmitter Follow the steps in Table 17 if needed While reading the transmitter s output on an SFC or a voltmeter position the transmitter so the output reading is at or near zero and then completely tighten the mounting bolts Perform an
276. table solvent 4 Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion Look for possible residue and clean if necessary NOTE If diaphragm is dented has distorted convolutions or radial wrinkles performance may be affected Contact TAC for assistance 5 Replace O ring ATTENTION We recommend that you install a new O ring whenever a process head is removed for cleaning The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single head design has two O ring grooves A large one which is 2 in 50 8 mm in diameter and a small one which is 1 3 in 33 mm in diameter as shown in the following illustration On high pressure model STG180 GP transmitters be sure to use a small O ring in the smaller inner groove On other models of GP and AP transmitters use a large O ring in the larger outer groove Never use both O rings together Larger O ring Smaller O ring groove for groove for lower pressure high pressure applications applications GP AP Process Head For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual head design see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters in Step 2 Continued on next page 172 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Procedure continued Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Step Action 6 Coat threads on p
277. tal readout represents output in percent of span This is the default engineering units selection FLOW Transmitter is configured for Square Root output conformity OUTPUT MODE Transmitter is in its output mode and it is not sending a real PV signal CHECK STATUS Transmitter in DE mode is broadcasting a critical status or transmitter in Analog mode has an output that is less than 2 0 or greater than 106 Use the SFC to check transmitter s status Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 163 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continuec Display description continued Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51 continued Display Indicator What It Means When Lit KNOWN VALUE The Upper Value or Lower Value being displayed has previously been configured to the value shown ANALOG Transmitter is in its Analog mode When indicator is OFF transmitter is in its DE mode Inches of Water is selected engineering units for digital readout K Multiplies digital reading by 1 000 Turns on automatically when reading exceeds 1999 GPH Gallons per hour is selected engineering units for digital readout Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this selection Gallons per minute is selected engineering units for digital readout Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this selection mmHg Millimeters of Mercury is selected engineer
278. ted Tank 33 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 265 L cont d Local Smart Meter Keystroke Summary Using SFC 102 Meter Transmitter Interaction 67 Options 3 Output Conformity 204 Pushbuttons 03 Reference Specifications 24 Set Up Summary Using Meter Pushbuttons 20 Set Up Using Meter Psuhbuttons 103 Set Up Using SFC 96 Setting display of LRV using meter pushbuttons 09 Local Smart Meter Display Description 263 Error Codes 166 Typical Indications 164 Local Zero and Span Adjusting Procedure 94 Loop wiring 47 LRV Lower Range Value 63 LRV and URV Keying in Values 80 Keystroke Summary Applied Pressures 93 Keystroke Summary Keying in Values 87 Setting to Applied Pressures 82 M Maintenance Routine 170 Memories Non volatile 61 SFC and ST 3000 61 Message Format DE Only Selecting 11 94 DE Mode Only 64 Keystroke Summary 95 Meter Body Replacing 76 Meter Engineering Units 65 Mode and Software Checking 54 Mode of Operation Changing 57 Keystroke Summary 58 Model Number Format 4 Mounting Area Considerations 19 Index Mounting Location Suggested 38 Mounting Precautions Model STD110 37 Models STA122 and STA922 30 N Non volatile Memory Copying data into non volatile memory 62 ST 3000 61 Number Symbol Clearing 97 Operation Data Accessing 52 Output Conformity 63 Keystroke Summary 74 Selecting 73 Smart Meter setu
279. teps for connecting power to the installation transmitter For loop wiring and external wiring diagrams refer to the rawings installation drawings presented in Section 13 Detailed drawings are provided for transmitter installation 1n non intrinsically safe areas and for intrinsically safe loops in hazardous area locations If you are using the transmitter with Honeywell s TPS system see the previous TPS reference ATTENTION All wiring must comply with local codes regulations and ordinances e If you will be using the transmitter a hazardous area be sure to review the hazardous location reference data included 1n Appendix D of this manual before operating the transmitter Table 16 Wiring the Transmitter Step Action 1 Loosen end cap lock using a 1 5 mm allen wrench and remove end cap cover from terminal block end of electronics housing 2 Feed loop power leads through one of conduit entrances on either side of electronics housing Plug whichever entrance you do not use ATTENTION The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG wire 3 Observing polarity connect positive loop power lead to SIGNAL terminal and negative loop power lead to SIGNAL terminal Example Connecting loop power to transmitter 3 screw terminal block 5 screw terminal option LP 4 Replace end cap and tighten end cap lock Continued on next page 44 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s
280. ter Mounting Bracket 4 End Caps Local Smart Connector Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 175 9 4 Replacing PWA continued Procedure continued Table55 Replacing PWA continued Step Action 4 If your transmitter Then has Local Smart Meter go to Step 5 Option does not have Local Smart go to Step 7 Meter Option 5 Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA side without cable connectors Unplug meter cable from connector on PWA Remove screw retainers from other side of mounting screws so you can remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA Set PWA aside Mounting Screws PWA Connector Side Meter cable is installed between PWA and mounting bracket
281. ter with Zero and Span adjustment option you may substitute the Local Smart Meter readings for the milliammeter readings For example with zero input pressure applied assume that the meter reads 4 inH2O instead of 0 inH2O In this case the meter reading is greater than O or 4 mA Example Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches of water Honeywell v ANALOG Inh O Continued on next page 86 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments continued Procedure continued Table 27 setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 6 a Press and hold ZERO button on Local Zero and Span assembly or Local Smart Meter Honeywell v v 00 1 Press amp 1 0 9 Hold ANALOG ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default unit of percent during this operation If the error code Ero appears on the display you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span adjustments b Press Decrease button once to complete this function ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1 2 second and then returns reading 0 Display goes blank for 1 2 second and returns with zero reading c Check that milliammeter reading equals 4 mA and release ZERO button ATTENT
282. th the transmitter by pressing the ID key Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 1 LJ IPN DIP PIT 30414 Initiate shift key selection 1111 RS 8 P A b PIT 3 04111 up first group of 16 characters S c R A T C H PJAID E TS Er SI 2 A 5 1211 T Call second group of 16 Next 98 248258 2 characters 3 51 Plajo 12111 Move cursor to 6th character s PEG DESI Cursor moves one character space to right with each press Use lt key to move cursor one character space to left with each press Note that cursor keys will automatically toggle between pad 1 and 2 when moving forward or backward through message as applicable 5 2 Enter alpha mode so you can use NUM NUM BUY 11211141 SH FIT SFC keyboard to enter alphabetic characters 5 m E 5 2111 Key in E and space to change 5 021 191 151911 name from JOHN to JOE SCR PAD 5 2 6 T2 T Exit alpha mode ALPHA Ts SE CO Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 a
283. tly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 8 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 146 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals Procedure The procedure in Table 45 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application Refer to Figure 48 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 48 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter with Remote Seals LP Side nor gee Br E H2 Differential Fixed Pressure Variable Ref Leg Transmitter with Head H1 remote seals Zero Level empty IL TI IL TI HP Side ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 45 we are assuming that the tank 1s empty and the remote seal flanges are installed at their final positions The transmitter 15 a model STR93D or STR12D with a compound characterized meter body The DP transmitter has its high pressure HP side connected to the tank s lower flange and low pressure LP side connected to the upper flange Note that connections would
284. to any value between 0 4mA and 100 20mA percent and maintain that output This makes it easy to verify loop operation through the accurate simulation of transmitter output signals before bringing the loop on line Note that the constant current source mode 15 also referred to as the output mode The transmitter does not measure the input or update the output while it is in the constant current source mode Procedure The procedure in Table 38 outlines the steps for using a transmitter 1n its output mode and clearing the output mode Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant Current Source Mode Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify loop pressure type transmitter calibration connect a precision milliammeter or a voltmeter across 250 ohm resistor in loop to compare readings 2 DE READ TlAe Nol 11111111 Be sure any switches that may trip 1 5 s E c u R E B alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 101 1111 111111 Confirm that TRIPS are secured is F c and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011
285. tput conformity selections Table 34 Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display Values Engineering Output Set Units code Conformity Lower Display Value Upper Display Value EUO through EUC Linear No set automatically No set automatically Pressure type units EUO EUD EUE and EUF Square root No fixed at zero Yes 96 GPM or Custom Use Table 36 Linear Yes Yes Use Table 35 Use Table 36 Setting Lower and To set the lower and upper display limit values for the meter display Upper Display Values perform the procedures in Tables 35 and 36 Also note that in each procedure you must e First set the magnitude range for each display value This enables the multiplier K on the display for indicating larger ranges greater than 19999 and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or right depending on the precision you want to show for that value e Next set the display value This procedure sets the display limit of the meter to represent minimum and maximim transmitter output 0 and 100 output Note Magnitude range and display values are set for both upper and lower 1f applicable display limits During normal operation the display range of the meter digital readout is 19 990 000 and is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible for the digits available up to 1 100th of a unit Setting Lower Display The procedure in Table 35 outlines the steps for setting the lower dis
286. transmitter s database to alter its operating characteristics We call this process of viewing and or changing database parameters configuration Figure 23 shows a graphic summation of the configuration process Figure 23 summary of Configuration Process Configuration Database Transmitter s Operating Characteristics View and or change database parameters SFC If the transmitter 1s operating in the DE mode you can also configure the transmitter s configuration database through displays at the Universal Station or GUS See the PM APM Smartline Integration Manual 2 410 for details Continued on next page 60 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 2 Overview Continued SFC and ST 3000 transmitter memories Both the SFC and the ST 3000 transmitter have working memories as shown in Figure 24 They serve as temporary storage areas for data exchanged between the SFC and the transmitter during communications The transmitter also has a non volatile memory as the permanent storage area for a backup copy of all the data held in the working memory This memory retains its data even if the transmitter loses power The SFC has a second temporary storage area called the hold memory This memory supports the SFC s save and restore functions It serves as the temporary storage area for a configuration database saved from a transmitter until it can be restored in a
287. transmitter Data in this memory can not be displayed or altered and it will be lost if the SFC is turned off Figure 24 shows the working relationship between SFC and transmitter memories during communications Figure 24 SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories 7 tA re 7 Working Memory Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 61 6 2 Overview Continued Copying data into non volatile memory ATTENTION When setting up or configuring a ST 3000 whether you are changing one element or a full database all configuration data must be copied into the transmitter s non volatile memory Normally thirty seconds after a value 18 changed the transmitter automatically copies it into the non volatile memory But if you change an element and power goes down before the change 1s copied to non volatile memory you will lose the data in the working memory Therefore whenever you make any changes in the transmitter using the SFC always end your procedure by pressing SHIFT and ENTER This action immediately copies the changes from working memory to non volatile memory Continued on next page 62 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 2 Overview Continued What to configure Table 20 summarizes the parameters that are included in the configuration database for an ST 3000 pressure transmitter in eith
288. trical apparatus within hazardous classified locations of the United States 1s conducted under the provisions of the National Electrical Code NEC ANSI NFPA 70 Article 500 and within Canada under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code CEC C22 1 Part 1 Section 19 Classes Hazardous classified locations in both the United States and Canada are categorized into one of these three classes Description of Hazardous Location I Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures Presence of combustible dusts powders or grains Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings Divisions The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of risk present Description of Risk Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors or combustible dust in Suspension are continuously intermittently or periodically present under normal operating conditions Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present but normally confined within closed containers or systems from which they can escape only under abnormal or fault conditions Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be thrown into suspension Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 253 D 1 Examples Groups North American Classification of Hazardous Locations
289. ude process variable as well as configuration database data depending upon the broadcast format selected during configuration The SFC model STS103 with software version 5 0 or greater is fully compatible with all Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 transmitters The SFC will operate with transmitters that have older software versions but functions will be limited to those applicable for the transmitter software The ST 3000 transmitters are available with what is called a write protect option It consists of a jumper located on the transmitter s PWA that you can position to allow read and write access or read only access to the transmitter s configuration database When the jumper is in the read only position you can only read view the transmitter s configuration and calibration data Note that the factory default jumper position is for read and write access There is no need to check the jumper position unless you want to change it Figure 20 shows the location of the write protect jumper on the PWA for Release 300 transmitters Figure 20 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections Failsafe Direction Jumper Read and Write Read Only k Power Connector Meter Connector 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 55 92 9 Making Initial Checks Continued Local smart meter You can check the status of all the indicators on the Local Smart Meter display indic
290. ued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 89 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments continued Procedure continued Table 27 setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 10 Wait 30 seconds so that changes have been copied to the transmitter s non volatile memory 11 Remove applied pressure and turn OFF transmitter power 12 Replace end cap on PWA side of electronics housing and tighten lock 13 Remove milliammeter from TEST terminals and replace end cap and tighten lock 14 Turn ON transmitter power and check Local Smart Meter reading if applicable Figure 32 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments ST 3000 Field Terminals Milliammeter STR3015 90 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only DE configuration You must configure these additional parameters for a transmitter the parameters DE mode of operation e Mode of Output Signal Indication e Message Format This section and the next section cover how to configure these parameters individually However once you enter the DE configuration function you can access all DE configuration parameters serially without exiting the function Just use the A NEXT and PREv ke
291. umber using the SFC or SCT 3000 software application By Telephone Honeywell Solution Support Center Phone 1 800 423 9883 U S only Outside the U S call 1 602 313 6510 Additional Help You may also seek additional help by contacting the Honeywell distributor who supplied your ST 3000 transmitter By E mail You can also e mail your technical questions or comments about this product to Honeywell Solution Support Center e mail ace honeywell com Problem Resolution If it 15 determined that a hardware problem exists a replacement transmitter or part will be shipped with instructions for returning the defective unit Please do not return your transmitter without authorization from Honeywell s Solution Support Center or until the replacement has been received 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual xiii Section 1 Overview First Time Users Only 1 1 Introduction Section contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction ST 3000 Transmitters omart Field Communicator Transmitter SFC Order Local Smart Meter Options About this section This section 1s intended for users who have never worked with our ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and its companion operator interface device the hand held Smart Field Communicator SFC before It provides some general information to acquaint you with the ST 3000 transmitter and the SFC Honeywell also offers the SCT 3000 Sma
292. ust connect the shield to ground at the power supply side of the wiring only and leave it insulated at the transmitter side ATTENTION The emission limits of EN 50081 2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters 98 feet to the antenna e In special cases when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment 18 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter Evaluate conditions The ST 3000 transmitter 1s designed to operate in common indoor industrial environments as well as outdoors To assure optimum performance evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices for electronic pressure transmitters e Environmental Conditions Ambient Temperature Relative Humidity e Potential Noise Sources Radio Frequency Interference RFI Electromagnetic Interference EMI e Vibration Sources
293. ve earth green or green yellow supply system conductor Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 Table of Contents FR SU uice etoile E E An M D E nina MD IV me ease IHE xiii SECTION 1 OVERVIEW FIRST TIME USERS 1 Codu 00125252 225 1 1 2 19000 mart O eR 2 129 COMMU GAL ON succo eek 8 4 Transmitter FO Order 11 tS Meter 13 SECTION 2 QUICK START 2 15 2 15 2 2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On Line 16 SECTION PREINSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 17 Rmi 17 92 OBContomity Europe NOLUGCO
294. vod ONIAVeGI 41935 LON 6188 0 50 013144 0 37955 m WS 00 Vue j N Sy 6 7 N N Sj3LHIIASNVeSHI 000615 I ET WS 00 VWel 1110 S dL LAVWS e amp dldWN 3lUWde 00062 4LVNASL Iv e3JLHIASNVsSI 000515 DNISIA dLiVNeldl IV AS 00 VWel D 3 430049 dn so NUISIAIG III II I 55912 Cd 414155 10 50 0 672 6 8 Z 3 9ATqe Iv2v0c 34114093 ALON INAWdINOS ADS LNOO 4 3 9 SALON GJ3183ANU2 AINAVA SNLVAVddV I31VIOUSSV I3AU8ddV ALILIN3 ALON a4M0d ALON IN4WdINOS L9 9 SALON HN INI QI 3133ANU2 33I83V8 SNLVAVdd C4ALVIOOSSV JAW 1 lddf1S NOILVOU 1 SRDOdVvZVvH NLIN v lt 9 9 9NIAVUT 319295 LON LXI 517 02 3 TILXIV Dee emen 06 006 TSCOW 33L3W4 SDONNV NOILdO 44134 3lDW3es 000 VMWel JALVNASL IV 838 1 1 4 113 E 3100 7 3 9 310 LNAWdINOS QI3LI3ANOJ N3DRIVE SNLVAVdd 13191905857 0 ALILIN3 31 AlddNS JW 00 VW3 006 001 531335 YILLINSNVAL 000615 T
295. wrenches You will need the 4mm size wrench for the outside set screw Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 29 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued ATTENTION Precautions for Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans The mounting position of a model STA 122 or STA922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a model STD110 Draft Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter spans become smaller A maximum zero shift of 2 5 mm Hg for an absolute transmitter or 1 5 2 for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting position which 1s rotated 90 degrees from vertical A typical zero shift of 0 12 mm Hg or 0 20 in H20 can occur for 5 degree rotation from vertical To minimize these positional effects on calibration zero shift take the appropriate mounting precautions that follow for the given transmitter model For a model STA122 or STA922 transmitter you must ensure that the transmitter 1s vertical when mounting it You do this by leveling the transmitter side to side and front to back See Figure 9 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance Figure 9 Leveling a Model STA 122 or 922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter Models STA122 and STA922 Process Head Position spirit balance on center section of meter body only Continued on nex
296. xcept for first active digit value setting which will be O unless lower value was set before Honeywell Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 111 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase A button to select the next First digit value setting available digit value or Decrease W button to select the previous digit value Honeywell Repeat this action until desired value is on yw display Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in first digit and activate next active digit Readout now displays next active digit which will be zero unless lower value was set before Press and hold to Press and hold to 7 Press Increase A button to select the next rough values 0 available digit value or Decrease W button to 1 select the previous digit value 2 Repeat this action until desired value is on display 5 6 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in 7 second digit and activate next active digit 8 Readout now displays next active digit which will be zero unless lower value was set before Press Increase A button to select the next Third digit value setting available digit value or Decrease button to select the previous digit value Honeywell Repeat this action until desired value is on yw display 0 Press and hold to Press and hold to s
297. xchange is working ENTER 5 F C es HT T T 13191111 Applied URV setting stored in transmitter s working memory Continued on next page 82 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 6 7 Procedure 2 continued Setting Range Values Using SFC continued Table 26 setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 9181 1111 1 felt 13191114 Initiates shift key selection LLELEISISPIEFBESLEETLTT FT T T IFFT 191111 5 data in transmitter s non ENTER volatile memory This takes Yes 5 111 316111 DIA TJA foje JPjT _ approximately 8 seconds Keystroke 2 summary Figure 31 shows keystroke summary for setting LRV and to applied pressures for quick reference Figure 31 Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures NON VOL NON VOL 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 83 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Local zero and span ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters are available with optional local zero option and span adjustments This option is for applications that do not require an SFC nor digital integration with our TPS system About local You must app
298. ys to step through the parameter selections Background You can select the output signal mode for digital transmission to be one of these three modes as described in Table 20 e Single Range e Dual Range STDC e Single Range W SV Procedure The procedure in Table 28 outlines the steps for selecting a Single Range W SV mode for example purposes only Table 28 selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 t Ti INT 1 felt 13191111 Initiate shift key selection cnc PE EERE FE EREM Gal ue OE CONFIG menu Out 5 WJORIKIINIGI ITEM jcjo Njr 131011 211 19 1 816111 2 DE 220 DJE 13101111 Calls up next output signal mode MENU S i njg tje R nje Selection ITEM DE OTE 13191111 Repeatedly press MENU ITEM key to gt MENU R a n aJe C s T D C step through all output signal mode ITEM selections listed in Table 20 in sequence Stop when Single Range W SV mode is on display Continued on next page 7 00 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 91 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only continued Procedure continued Table 28 selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 3 NON VOL DJE TeTe NTF Ph 13
299. zard Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in Group E or F including flour wood grain and other dusts of similarly hazardous characteristics Continued on next page 254 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Methods of Protection following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in given locations Explosionproof XP Division 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Intrinsic Safety IS Division 1 amp 2 Limit energy of sparks under normal and fault conditions Pressurized Type 2 Keeps flammable gas out Nonincendive NI Division 2 No arcs sparks or hot surfaces under normal conditions Pressurized Type X and Y Keeps flammable gas out Temperature Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous Classification classified location must also be classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to either 40 C 104 F or the maximum operating ambient of the equipment whichever 18 greater The maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present The temperature shall be indicated identification numbers as listed in the following table Maximum Temperature Temperature Degrees C Degrees F Identification Number 450 84
300. ze hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside housing lt q Set Screw Process Head Process Head Meter Body Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it from electronics housing Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center section Remove process heads and bolts Continued on next page 178 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 00 9 5 Replacing Meter Body continuea Procedure continued Table56 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step Action 5 Remove O ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent 6 Replace O ring ATTENTION The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single head design has two O ring grooves A large one which is 2 in 50 8 mm in diameter and a small one which is 1 3 in 33 mm in diameter as shown in the following illustration On high pressure model STG180 GP transmitters be sure to use a small O ring in the smaller inner groove On other models of GP and AP transmitters use a large O ring in the larger outer groove Never use both O rings together Larger O ring Smaller O ring groove for groove for lower

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MANUEL D'INSTALLATION INSTALLATION MANUAL  Xerox DocuMate 3125 scanner Guia de usuário  Betriebs - Feuer  Manuel d`utilisation de Zappiti Media Center V3  Uniden UIP300 Owner`s manual  User Guide  User Manual  E4356A Operating and Programmign Guide  E-3    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file